ma^gA^^sgg^ / THE LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES LESSONS IN Graphic Shorthand (GABELSBERGER) PREPARED FOR THE AMERICAN PUBLIC BY C. R. LIPPMANN S, r J 5 ■> J > • O*' « J J 3 > * » t * • J * -#- * > J J > J J J J ' > J > , J . . , J J 9 a > J J J i J 3 J * J J * J ' ,yU \' PHILADELPHIA J. B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY 1899 Copyright, 1899, By J. B. LiPPiNCOTT Company. « » • • • '• • • • • • « • • • • • « • « • • • M ' » • • » • • • • • • • • • • • • • w •••• * a*** ••• • *• ••• • • ••* !•• " • • • • •,- • • ; • • o PREFACE ••♦•♦" IN presenting to the pnblic this text-book, it seems fitting that some few words concerning the system and its inventor sliould be snbmitted to the reader. Grajihic Shortliand, as it now stands in America, is an adaptation of the system invented in 1817 by Francis Xavier Gabelsberger, of iMnnich, and used by him and his disciples for many years in reporting the proceedings of the Bavarian Parliament, before he issued it (1834) in book form under the auspices of the govern- ment. The evolution of the system from the ordinary script writing of our own day is outlined in the lessons themselves, and so need not be detailed here. As to the general scope of the system, however, it may be said that it has spread bevond any Dossible dreams of its inventor, being now used in twenty lanaruagcs so diverse in structure and vocabulary as English, Spanish, German, Hungarian, French, Italian, Czechish, Polish, Greek, Norwegian, etc. ; furthermore, it is used in over forty parliaments for purposes of official record, and is taught in government schools in many countries, Austria alone using it in seven different languages in her schools. ^ The following lessons explain themselves. The aim has always been to make ^ them interesting as well as instructive, and to insure a good knowledge of the svstem ^ by constant repetition of essential details, even at the risk of wearying those to whom g such repetition is unnecessary. The shorthand plates are taken direct from pen copv, "■ in whi(;h no caligraphic results have been attempted, the object being rather to produce such outlines as would be found in the note-book of a fairly careful stenographer. It " should be noted here that, in order to bring out the shading more emphaticallv, the 5 shaded outlines have been made rather heavy. This should not be imitated too faith- fully by the student, liowever ; as is stated in the lessons, a slight increase of pressure on the pen or pencil is sufficient for this purpose. -J \Z For the business or professional man, who desires merely to take })rivate mem- •" oranda, the first ten lessons w^ill suffice ; while the commercial or literary amanuensis, who may be called upon to write as many as a hundred and twenty words a minute, will need the entire book. Only those who wish to qualify themselves for verbatim reporting (court and convention reporting) will be obliged to master the full Reporting Style of the system. The author takes this occasion to thank those friends whose encouras^ement and advice Avere of such assistance to him in preparing these lessons, which are now offered to the impartial criticism of a discriminating public. Philadelphia, July 1, 1899. 45 -1 Lesson No. i. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. GENERAL RULES. A careful attention to these general instructions will render your progress much more rajjid and satisfactory, bj' enabling you to spend all your energies in the right direction, so that you will have nothing to unlearn. Do not try to cover the lesson all at one time ; a good plan is to divide the lessons into sections, studying a section each day, and reviewing the whole lesson before going further. For the first three lessons have the practice-sheet ruled like the lesson-sheet, so that j'ou may become accustomed to writing the shorthand characters the correct size. After this has been accomplished, only the bottom-centre-line (a), simply called the line, will ha retained. The next line above line (o) is the top-centre-line {b), the next one above is the to2>line (c), and the one below the bottom-centre-line is called the bottom-line (d). Shorthand characters reaching from the line to the top- or bottom-line are called large letters; those reaching from the line to the top-centre-line are medium, letters; And those written on the line, but not reaching the top-centre-line, are stiiall letters. Short- hand t, for instance, is a large letter, 6 is a medium, letter, and I a small letter. In practising the words given, trace them at first with a drj' pen over the printed characters on the lesson-sheet, before starting to tvrite them indej^endentli/, In this way accustoming the hand to the outline. Practice each word given until you can readily write it without the aid of the lesson-sheet. Do not attempt to attain speed for the present, but direct your efforts to writing the outlines correctly and gracefully ; the violation of this rule is the cause of much trouble to the student. The outlines are shaded naturally, just as in longhand wi'iting. No iqy-stroke is shaded, and care must be taken not to shade the down-strokes too heavily. Remember that we write by sound only, and do not write what you do not hear. For instance, "through" is written "thru;" in "write," the initial w and final e are omitted, leaving r-'i-t. This outline cannot be confounded M'ith lorit, as we have different means for expressing the short "i", as in " hit." Be careful to distinguish between a vowel-sign and a "vowel-sound". In these lessons the signs will be italicized, while the "sounds will be placed in quotation marks". Fix in your mind thoroughly the fact that vowel-sounds are long or short, according to the time needed to pronounce them: thus, in both "race" and "raise" the vowel-sow «cZ is precisely the same, but in "race" the "a" is much shorter than in "raise," the differ- ence being solely in the time required for pronunciation. In order to get used to this method of phonetic writing, it is advisable in the beginning to pronounce each word slowly as you write it; "light", for instance, pronounce " 1-i-t " (not "el-I-tee"); though, "th-6". Since every stroke in shorthand has a meaning, omit all superfluous flourishes. Always read what you write. It is essential to practice reading as well as writing. A good stenographer should be able to read his notes more rapidly than he writes them. When you have mastered a lesson, read the shorthand plate without the aid of the text ; if you come across a word which is not clear to you, look up the respective rules in the lesson and refresh your memory on that point. Then write in shorthand the numbered words or sentences of the lesson, and compare your transcript with the shorthand plate. If there is a discrepancy between your notes and those on the plate, look up and acquaint yourself again with the rules under the respective number. Remember that the key to success is perseverance, which, applied to shorthand, means faithful, relentless practice. 5 Lesson i. Lessons in Graphic Shorthand* By C. R. LIPPMANN. C /'/ ? 3 -f r/;; /TT^.v i: i:l ix f/y-;.^ ^ U />- ^ .^ .^ ^^ ^ -l» Lb L^ .^i. ^= 1 1, 1/ 1— 7~ ""37 72 73 3=? 77 73 Ty 37 5^7 7S^ ?7~~ ^a Jl ?? ?3^ 75~' I he 63^ 70 /^ 7' 7ity^ 73 74 TJ 7^ 77 /7S L\ U J \^^ .-^ ■^-\ \^ 77. >-V. -yC- — , = '^T. ^ ^^ Ir^ ^ v^^^ U 1/ J K>^ »y -^ \^ Tl.T^-jL — ^ = 77. ^ ^ To T/ Ji 73 Jfl 7^ 37 Jf Jg J^ Jd ^7 gzT /<5 75i? /o^fl. /*f 7?d ■~ 7x3 /«4 iis\ia6 727 'iK/ 7i§ 73i5 7«7 75g 755 /^4 /3Sy/ /jrf/ J^T 737 JS^ 7?2 ;*; 7?z A?S 744 ^ 7?3= 77 Til^ 7?7 TiX 745F 755 779 77^^ 77g /j-4 777" TS?" / /J^^ 777 /jy 7^ M -Jk-"^^ Ly^^ ^ -^ ^^ ^-^^ .<^^^r% ^ ^ «>^-^ A >i L- N. Z- ^ ^^^ ^ C-^^ 7ti Tiz 7S3 7^? 7T TijT 7tt~76f TtSTtg 773 7/7 ^^ /?» /74 Z/-*" f^b 'jy /Jii t -^w /^ ^-^. ^ 'U. y^ ^l . J^ .^-^ ^ _y^ y^^ -ZtZZ^^ZIZ m 777 / SS y ^ '*3 y '^f' y '9' I I 's^ ~ ^ 2^ 133 C^ F. 1 ».^ a ^ . l ^ o C>o t?irr • . \X o m/ f O V>./ « ^ GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. The Theory of "Graphic" Shorthand. Let us now analyze the ■word "Vine" on the lesson-sheet. The first letter reads (itle (1) : cutting down a longhand t to its simplest outline gives us the Graphic t (oj, which may be traced upward or downward, as convenience requires; using tlie initial hair-stroke of longhand i for Graphic i (G), and joining t and /, we write the word tie (7) ; the final e, lieing mute, is not written, since we write by sounds only. (In spelling words for short- nand jiurposes it is advisable to pronounce " t," not " te-ee". ) To write iicjht add t to tie where i ends (8), but to save the waste of time in making the angle, continue the final t in the same slope as /, thus obtaining a straight outline in the correct form for fight (9). Reducing an I to its smallest size gives us the shorihand I (10) : this is practically an ordinary /, but traced so small that the loop dwindles into a mere dot. This letter, by means of its initial or final hair-stroke, blends readily with others, as shown in (11). Here we see separated the letters which, when joined, form the word title (12). In final I, the final hair-stroke is omitted. Now write and read light il-i-t) (13) ; the initial hair-stroke is omitted in the initial I : tile (14). You will notice that in shorthand a letter is connected just where the preceding one ends, without regard to alignment, in order to save time. The shortest and most characteristic part of b forms the shorthand b (15). The sound "a" (either short or long), occurs more frequently than any other, and is therefore expressed by the shortest possible outline, the initial hair-stroke of a longhand a (16). By joining, i.e., blending, b and a (pronounced " ay"), we get bay (2) and (17). The a stroke cannot be con- founded with the i stroke (6), because the latter is three times as long as a, reaching diagonally, from the line to the top-centre-line: note the diflference between bay (17) and by (18). Now write bale (19) ; note how the final stroke of b forms the ay stroke and is blended with the initial stroke of I: bile (20): tail (or tale) (21), and tell (22) ; note that the short vowel-sound is indicated by doubling the I ; the same rule applies to bale (or bail) (23) and bell (24). Notice the distinction we made between a vowel or vowel-sign, and a voivel-sound. The vowel or vowel-sign in bale is a, in bell is e, but the vowel-sound in both words is prac- tically the same, except that in the former word it is longer than in the latter. For this reason, in shorthand we employ the same vowel-sign for both, indicating the length of the sound by means of single or double following consonants. As to tale and tail ; although they are written with the same characters, we can infer the right meaning from the con- text, just as in conversation we can distinguish between two words having the same sound. Write and read ale (25), and lay (26); note how the a stroke blends with the initial and final stroke of I in these words, expressing the vowel-sound respectively before and after I. Lie (27): ally (28); "y", having the same sound as "i", is expressed by the i stroke ; when it has the short "i" sound, it is expressed like the short "i", as will be shown later. Alight (29) : able (30) ; here the a stroke is raised to join b ; this is always done when the following letter does not .start on the line. Table (31) : this word illustrates a very important rule, i.e., the a stroke between two consonants is always made in such a direction as to meet the following letter ; in other words, the connecting stroke between two consonants expresses the vowel-sound "a", j^^'ovided there is no other vowel expressed. Bible (32) ; there are no capital letters in shorthand : libel (33). (34) shows how g is derived : gale (35) : beg (36) : get (37) ; when t occurs with only one other consonant, a short "a" is to be read between the two. {Gate is written differ- ently, as will be shown in the second lesson.) The last stroke of longhand m is taken for the Graphic m (38): you will now understand game (3), which consists of g and m, joined by the vowel-stroke expressing "a": might (39) : mail or male (40) : mile (41) : lime (42) : kune (43) : time (44) : item (45) : note the dis- tinction between aim (46) and may (47) : melt (48) : belt (49). (50) shows the derivation of d, which, joined with ay, makes day. Note aid (51) : day (52) : die or dye (53) : dale (54) and dell (55) : maid or made (56) : dame (57) : dime (58). In debt (59), " b" is silent and therefore omitted. Tide (60) : abide (61) ; observe how, in connection with the / stroke, d stands half above the line, as otherwise it could not be con- veniently joined to i : bed (62), and bade (63). GRAPHIC SHORTHAXD. Graphic r is the top-stroke of longhand r (64). Note mare (65) : mire (66) : rhyme (67) : tear or tare (68) : better (69) : letter (70) ; no consonant is written double as a rule, — notice, however, the double II in bell (24), dell (55), etc. Rye (71) : lighter (72) : observe the differ- ence between air (73) and ray (74). (75) shows the evolution of n, which is the final half of a quickly traced, small, long- hand n. Men (76) : nail (77) : ten (78) : nine (79): mine (80) : nigh (81). Demon (82) : iron (83) ; the " o" in the last syllable of these words, and in words of the same class, is not sounded ; what we hear, and therefore write, is a short "a", which we express by simply joining the two consonants. Net (84) : rent (85). Graphic s is an ordinary longhand s, simplified in form and reduced in size (86). Same (87): raise (88) ; s also stands for c when this letter has the "s" sound, but to distinguish between " s" and the short, sharp sound of " c" in words like race (89), we shorten the connect- ive vowel-stroke, since the sound of race is shorter than that of raise. Where this rule can- not be applied, we express the sharp "s" sound by an enlarged s sign, as in rice (91), which compare with rise (90) : sale and sail (92) : sell (93) : assail (94) ; note the initial hair-stroke indicating the "ay" in this word. Sigh (95) : say (96) ; note the distinction between these words. In the evolution of tlie sj-mbol for the " th" sound, Graphic Shorthand is even more logical than ordinary script, which arbitrarily establishes " th" to represent a sound which is neither a "t", an "h", nor a combination of the two, being a lisped or "per- verted" "s", as shown in (97) and (98). You can readily convince yourself of this by saying aloud the word base (99) and lisping the " s", M'hich will make the word bathe (100). Note lace (101) and lathe (102). F (103) is the simplest part of longhand /, being a straight stroke extending below the line: it may be traced upward or downward to suit the convenience of the writer. In order to get the rest of the word as much as possible on the centre-line, t is preferably traced downward, while / is written upward when possible : fail (104) and (104-«) will illustrate this. In the latter form / is traced upward ; it is not necessary to write the connecting vowel-stroke between / and I, as /I could not occur as an independent word without a vowel between the consonants, and when there is no other vowel-sound expressed, the vowel-sound iiyiplied is "a". This vowel-sound may be represented in longhand either by "a", " ay", " e", or "ey". Fell (105) : fame (106) : life (107) is written on the same principle as l-i-t ; I is written on the bottom-line and / is traced in the i direction, reaching as far as the centre-line. Note knife (108),—/; is silent, and is not written,— and ^/?e (109) ; in the latter word, trace / in the i direction, in order to save the angle in joining it at the line with the i stroke ; this agrees with the reasoning in connection with tight (9). Fight (110) is shortened in (110-a), thus doing away with the inconvenient angle. Fade (111) : fare (112). IT is derived from the longhand h as shown in (113) ; this outline has a bolder sweep than g, and ends with a slight curve to the left. Note hay (114) : high or hie (115) : hail (116), and Iiell (117): hem (118): hide (119): hair (120): haze (121) : "z" is also represented by s and a long vowel-stroke, as shown in the case of 7'aise (88). These substitutions of related consonant-sounds will be found perfectly safe. In a case of this kind a clash of meanings will be found practically impossible: in hen (122), for the sake of convenience, n is joined to A by a loop. Graphic w is simply the first half of an ordinary longhand w (123). H after u>, in words like when (124), is superfluous, even misleading, since this combination of consonants is pronounced " hw", not " wh" ; i.e., the " h" must be sounded before the " w" can make itself heard. Note wail (125), and well (126) : tvhile (127) : tvent (128) : lueb (129) : way (130), and why (131) : ived{lS2), and wade (133); see how the difference in the vowel-sound is expressed ; a short sound, "wed", by a short connecting vowel-stroke, a long vowel, "wade", by a long stroke: wide (134): white (135): wet (136). V (137) is the down-stroke of a Gothic v. Write veil (138) : vile (139) : Dave (140) : knave (141) ; k is silent, and so not written : alive (142) : derive (143). In favor (144) the v is shortened to save the connecting stroke between v and r, thus suppressing the short "a" sound; no " o" is sounded in pronouncing this word, — see the note in connection with demon (82) : (144) literally is spelt f-a-v-r, which cannot be mistaken for anything else. (145) shows the evolution of k. Deck (146) : beck (147). Note the difference between like (148) and alike (.149) : bike (150) : kennel (151) : care (152) : case (153). The last two words GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. illustrate the use of k to indicate the hard sound of " c ", just as s is used for the soft sound. When k is preceded by a long "a" sound, its outline is lengthened to about twice its usual size (154) : lake (155) : sake (156) : take (157) : make (158). In a similar manner n is length- ened to show a preceding long "a" sound (159): bane (100): main (161): sane (162) : vain, vane, or vein (163) : lane (164). Logograms ( Word Signs). Of the words in common use, sixty per cent, are small and recur very frequently : such words are /, you, he, am, have, and, of, for, etc. For the puipose of increasing speed, these words are never written in full, being indicated by standard abbreviations, called logograms. These logograms consist of one or more of the letters of the word in question. Those we have passed in this lesson are: t, standing for 7iot (165), b for be (166), m for am (167), d for do (168), r for ever (169), n and r joined for iiever (170), n for on (171), fh for the (172), / for for (173), h for have or has (174), tv for ive (175), v for very (176), k for can (177), the a stroke (178) stands for a, an, or at, — there is no danger that these words may conflict. It is very essential that these word signs (of which there are very few in this system) be well memorized, as this will greatly help the student to write rapidly. The slant shown in the lesson-sheet has been adopted as the one most generally in use ; any slant may be used, however, even the "vertical system" of handwriting being adapted to "Graphic Shorthand", since the slant of the letters is purely relative. Use any slant, whichever is most natural, taking care only that the relative positions of the letters shall be correct. Exercises. Translate sentences (179)— (198) into longhand, comparing them with the translation given beloM- ; then transcribe them again into shorthand, correcting your words by a comparison Mith the lesson-sheet. The principal factor in acquiring a good knowledge of shorthand is unwearying practice, until your hand instinctively traces the outline, without any help from your brain. (179) I set a day aside. (180) I gain my aim. (181 ) I like a fine fireside. (182) I raise my rifle ; I take aim at the red men ; may I fire? (183) Take the way by the lakeside, said I. (184) They say they can ride the bike well. (185) The tide may rise. (186) The hen may have laid an egg. (187) May we ever be as gay again. (188) Be on the right side. (189) Then the men may fight for the game. (190) Sell the kite. (191) Tell the tale. (192) Do they dye the hair? (193) We do not like the knife. (194) May the base design fail. (195) Write the letter for the rent. (196) We like wine. (197) The demon can never be right. (198) I fell on the thigh. You will now be able to write the following exercise, without the aid of the lesson- sheet. Compare what you have written Avith the sheet, correcting any mistakes. Go over the ground until the rules are thoroughly impressed on your mind. The second lesson will be of no value to you unless you have mastered the first. This exercise will appear written in shorthand in Lesson No. 2, thus giving you an opportunity to compare and correct what you have written. (a) I cannot have my way. (b) The men said I might gain a favor, (e) I take the cake, (d) I aim high, (e) I dare not sell the lemon, (f) The maiden has the veil. (g) Write the letter right away, (h) I like white wine very well. (Note. — The word demon, as written above, is pronounced "di^niou"; to write the word "demon", as it is most generally pronounced, will recjuire a vowel-sign which has not yet been illustrated. The word has been used to show the illogical character of English spelling : if we write the word lemon, the pronunciation will at once suggest itself, the "e" being pronounced as a short "ay"; but, in donon. \\v use the same sign to express :i sound belonging to a totally ditterent class of vowels. J 10 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Lesson No. 2. Before you start with this lesson, be sure that j-ou know the first lesson thoroughly, aud read again the General Rules, which must be borne in mind throughout the whole course. Compare the writing exercises of Lesson 1 with the transcription on sheet No. 2 (a-h), and if j-ou discover any mistakes in your exercise, go over the respective rules again until you have mastered them ; for it is essential that no new principle be taken up until those explained in the previous lessons have been thoroughly absorbed. The observance of this rule is essential to success, and failure to follow it will be fatal. This lesson, which contains a principle entirely new to you, is the most difflcult of the course ; but, as shown by the reading exercise, it will bring you ahead considerably, and after you have mastered it there will be easy sailing. Do not be discouraged by the constant difference between the spelling aud pronunciation of a word. Fix in mind the sound of the word ; then write just ivhat you hear and omit everything else. Thus, "nation", which sounds like nashen, is written in that manner; "judge" which sounds like juj, is written in that manner. Tlie vowel-sounds require close attention at the begin- ning, otherwise they may perplex you, but if you will remember that there is a great difference between a "vowel-sound" — which you hear pronounced— and the vowel-sign — which is the alphabetical representation of a sound — you will have little trouble. For example : Lesson 1 stated that a short, almost horizontal stroke stands for the vowel-sound "a" (see Lesson 1, No. 16) ; this is not the letter a of the shorthand alphabet, but simply stands for the sound which is most frequently represented by «, e, ay, ai, ei, or ear as in hade (not had, which is again a different sound), hed (which has the same sound, only of shorter duration), bay, bail, veil, lead — same sound as veil, but of shorter duration. The letter, or vowel-sign, a will be shown later. Look again at the words bell and bail (Lesson 1, Nos. 23 and 24) ; the latter cannot be mistaken for ball, which is quite a different sound (being of the "aw" class), and will be shown later. The vowel-sign of a word does not at all affect the shorthand way of writing it, which is governed entirely by sound ; thus, in shorthand, bird is written as though it were spelled b-u-r-d ; girl is written as though it were spelled g-u-r-l, for it is pronounced that way. It would be entirely wrong to use in these words the diagonal stroke which stands for "i", as in bite or light (see Lesson 1), since this is not the vowel-sign for the vowel "i", but the representa^^ion of the sound as you hear it in tight, ride, etc. As was explained above, the only difference of the vowel-sounds in the words "get" and "gate" is the length of time consumed in pronouncing them; otherwise they are identical. Therefore, we use in shorthand the same vowel-sign for both, indicating the length of the sound by means of the connective vowel-stroke. Thus, in order to differen- tiate get from gate we use in the latter word the small t (1), which admits of the use of a connective vowel-stroke ; this small (! is a medium-sized letter, and can be traced downward only. Tlie two characters for t admit of nice distinctions. A short vowel-sound is to be read before large t only when it is preceded by not more than one consonant — compare grt (37): belt (41), in Lesson 1; in all other cases no vowel is to be read between large t and the preceding consonant — get (37) and belt (49), Lesson 1, illustrate this point also. Small t, when connected by means of the vowel-stroke, is always preceded by a vowel-sound, and can therefore not be used as initial letter. Note the difference between let (2) and late (3), get (4) and gate (5), debt (6) and date (7) — as b in debt is silent, it is omitted in shorthand. When small t is ju-eceded by the i stroke, a short vowel-sound, something like "a" is to be read before it ; right (8) and riot (9) will illustrate this point ; in the latter word we hear no "o", but a nondescript vowel-sound approaching a short "a" ; see also diet (10). There being no sound for "q" in the language, there is also no special sign for it; it sounds like "kw" and is represented by these two letters (11): note quite (12), and quiet (13). GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 11 Symbolical Vowel Refresextation. Ill Lesson 1 we wrote every souiul as it occurred ; for example, to write men, we joined ??i and /?, wliile the connective strolve indicated tiie vowel-sound. The sound in 7nan, Ijeing ditlerent, would require a different stroke ; but, as we do not wish to lengthen the outlines of the words by adding new strokes, we represent certain vowel sounds in a si/mbolical manner. When we consider the " a" sound as in 7iictn or in mar from the stand-point of phonetics, we come to the conclusion that it is the strongest of all vowel-sounds. The " i" sound as in sick or in seeA;— the latter has the same sound as sick, except that it is longer — is the highest sound ; and the " u" sound in mud or mood is the loirrnt sound of the language, as will be explained in the following paragraphs. This fundamental iirinciple should be kept well in mind, as the structure of sj'iiibolical vowel representation is built upon it. A as in man or in mar having the strongest sound, we can indicate this sound by "sti'engthening" — i.e., shading (thickening) — the adjoining consonant. For the sound as in man we shade the lo receding consonant ; can (14) — the noun, not the verb, for which a logo- gram was given in Lesson 1: cab (15) : lad (16) : dabble (17) ; distinguish between rabble and rebel (19) : tack (20)— no "ck" is used in shorthand. Note rat (21) and art (22) ; the latter word starts with the initial vowel-stroke to indicate that the vowel must be read before the consonant (/•) : the same rule applies to cat (23) and act (24), where the initial stroke of A; is raised so that it blends more conveniently with the vowel-stroke. The following consonant is shaded when the " a" sounds as in bar (25), car (26), bcdm (27), and calm (28). As these examples show, only a slight additional pressure on the pen or pencil is necessary to produce shading ; only down-strokes are shaded, and only that part of a down-stroke is shaded which could be shaded in ordinary handwriting. The sound of "i" as in sick is the highest of all vowel-sounds; i.e., the same voice will reach a higher pitch when pronouncing this sound than when uttering ''a'', for instance : this sound is therefore expressed by high position of one of the adjoining consonants ; in other words, it is indicated, but not written. The main rule is that the vowel sound is indicated by the following consonant, which in this case is "placed high". Note the difference between "th" and "s" in thick (29) and sick (30), and the difference between the long and short sound in sick and seek (31) : sin (32) and seen (38) : seal (34) and sill (35) : deal (36) : mere (37) : meek (38) : meal (39) and mill (40) : wheel or weal (41) and will (42) : wick (43) and weak or iceek (44) : din (4-5) and dean (46). In all these words (29-46) the consonant following the " i " (as in bit) sound is placed high. You will notice that these words show the tendency to indicate the " i" sound by the change of position of the smaller of the two consonants between which the sound occurs. It is not always the following consonant which is placed high, as in the above exam- ples ; when the preceding consonant is smaller than that following, or when they are both medium characters, it will be found more convenient to place the preceding con- sonant high, as shown by the following paragraph. This rule, which enables us to trace outlines more conveniently, applies only to initial syllables, not counting a prefix ; in the word liver, for example, I is placed high ; in deliver I is also placed high, because the syllable de is a prefix. In all other syllables the high position is always assumed by the following consonants. When in doubt as to which consonant is to be placed high, write the word both ways, placing the preceding consonant high in the first outline, and the following high in the second. Your own common sense will then tell you which is the more convenient outline. Note dim (47) and deem (48) ; here the length of the connective vowel-stroke indicates the length of the sound : dig (49) : hid (50) and heed (.51) : women (52) ; no "o" is heard in this word, which is pronounced as if it were spelt w-i-m-m-c-n, and the initial consonant is placed high : give (53). Another form of v, the second half of the Gothic v, will be found more convenient in connection with the "i" (as in bit) sound ; this sign is traced upward, and the following letter is naturally placed high, thus admitting of a saving in outline: veal (55) : vim (56). Note the difference between whit or icit (57) and wheat (58) : bit (59) and beat (60) : lid (61) and lead (62) : need (63) : seed (64) : sit (6-5) and i^cat (66). The sound of u as in mud or mood is the lowest sound of the vowel-scale and is, there- fore, expressed by low position, i.e., by placing the following small consonant below the line, 12 GEAPHIC SHORTHAND. and a following medium consonant through the line. The difference iu the length of the connective stroke will indicate whether the sound is " u" as in mud (67) or " oo" as iu mood (68). Note rum (69) and room (70) : cub (71) : love (72 or 72-a) ; the word is pronounced as though it were spelled l-u-v-e: lug (73): duck (74): cut (75). When t changes its position, the medium form must be employed and the length of the vowel indicated by the connec- tive-stroke : note boot (76), and butter (77). Oun (78): fun (79) — this word illustrates an important rule; as shown in Lesson 1, the shorthand letters are joined without regard to alignment, so that when a letter is placed low it need not necessarily stand right below the centre-line, but it must stand lower than the preceding consonant. iV in fun stands lower than/ and therefore expresses the " u ". In ton (80) the vowel-sound is the same as in tunnel, and n is, therefore, placed low. Compare this word with tune (81) : tub (82) : tube (83). An exception to the above rule is made when the " u " sound is in the first syllable of a word and is between two small characters ; as in the case of " i " (as in bit), a prefix-syllable is not counted : cull (84), cool (85), and lull (86) illustrate the point. When we can indicate the length of the sound by means of the connective-stroke, it is not necessary to employ double consonants, as illustrated by the three preceding words. Cur (87) : nun (88) : null (89) : thus (90) : cook (91) : soon (92). If son were spelled s-u-n, we would not pronounce it any differently; therefore it comes under the heading of the short u ; son or sun (93). If we analyze the vowel-sound in house, for instance, we find it to be the sum total of two vowel-sounds, — viz., "a" as in art and "oo" as in mood. We express this sound, there- fore, by the sum total of the two respective rules, i.e., by a combination of low j^osition and shading. Thus, in house (95), s is placed below the line and shaded : note the difference between ton and town (96) : sour (97) : mouth (98) : loud (99) : gown (100) : rouse (101) : mouse (102) : noun (103) : howl (104) : bout (105). To decide as to whether the preceding or the following consonant is to be placed low, use the rules given for the " u" sound. The preceding examples show how we can write seven different vowel-sounds without any additional effort ; including the three sounds taught in Lesson 1, — viz., "e" as in men, "a" as in m,ane, and "i" as in bite, — we can now write ten different vowel-sounds. This method of showing vowel-sounds without actually writing them being new to the student and totally different from the methods of longhand, he should, above all, thoroughly familiarize himself with this important chapter of shorthand, so that he can write the proper outline, showing the vowel-sound in a correct manner. For this reason the following Vowel Drill should be carefully studied ; observe in particular the method by which the different vowel- sounds are distinguished, even when the consonants of the outlines are identical. In rag (106), rig (107), and rug (108), note the shading of r in the first word, its high position in the second (as it is the smaller of the two consonants), and the low position of g in the third ; if r were i^laced low in this last word, the outline would not be so convenient. Ben (109) : bane (110) : ban (111) : bin (112) : bean (113) : bun (114) : boon (115) ; notice the logical distinction between the short and long sounds. As shown by Ben, no difference is made in shorthand between small letters and capitals, except that an outline may be under- lined to show that it starts with a capital letter. Beg (116) : bag (117) : big (118) : bug (119) ; the two last words illustrate well the convenience of placing the preceding and following letters respectively high and low. Bed (120) : bade (121) : bide (122) : bid (123) : bud (124). Beck (125) : bake (126) : back (127) : bike (128) : buck (129) : book (130). Cat (131) and kite (132) ; notice the diffei'ence between the direction of the t stroke in cat and the i-t stroke in kite : Kate (133) : cut (134) : kit (135 or 135-a) — here either the long or the medium t may be used. Leg (136) : lag (137) : lug (138) : lack (139)— notice I shaded : lake (140) : lick (141) : leak (142) : luck (143) : look (144; : in practice it will be found that it is scarcely necessary to discriminate between look and luke ; this can be done, however, by making the length of k in proportion to the length of the sound. Notice the diffei*ence between dame (145) and dime (146) : see also dam (147) : dim (148) : deem (149) : dumb (150) — b is silent and therefore omitted : doom (151). Tick (152) : Teck (153) : tack (154) : tuck (155) : took (156). Tin (157) : tan (158) : ten (159) : teen (160) : tun (161) : tune (162) : toivn (163). Bet (164) : bat (165) : bite (166) : bait (167) : butt (168) : bout (169) : boot (170) : bit (171) : beat or beet (172) — these two words are distin- guished in shorthand by the context, just as iu conversation ; large t could also be used in bit and beat. Fate (173) : feat or feet (174) : foot (175) : fiat (176). Fail (177) : feel (178 and 178-o) Lesson 2. ■~t^=^ ± ') -2^ cz. z: -C^ — ceqL ^'^ ^- ^ A y^ jsL. ^ r\<- V^ ')^ ISIZ^IZIZ V- — 77" ' /.^:L 'J ^j {, f- \X ^ ^ S "T^TT 1/^ /T ■/ .^ y ^ ^/ /^y .^"^^ "TTT ^^ ^^ 7- . ^u. -rv^-^-^^^::^ ^ ^y. nY, /k v/ -^ r^ -^ /^ 3 .^^. ^rv / ^>" "77- r^ //A ^^^ ;;>^ ^- ^ ^ /r — 37 -^rg- ~7^ / ^ ^ -^ rn^ ..-/ V 7* 7=^=Z r f g '-g ^ j T — ' / '>. " ? ^ ^. -^7 ^ r ^.- '/. / //" / C ^ ~:ft- T^ Z ^ ^^ T^V^ /K-^ ^ ^^ ' A j ^ > ^ "w A- » c r ^ 9^ / o S" -tf""-^ — ^^ 5 — ^ xt Jo '^- :)- // ■TJ K7- "775" //' r -^ < , d ^, ^ g~? " -2?0 ~ —-^ — _ j~ — .^^ -7 ~yT:^ 2- 10 £./S~ ±Ph 73S- 9- IHO 7 ' ^ V^ r /" r^ 'o-. -'^P^ (3 -^^-^ -2X" - ^^ -0 c: e '0'^ A ^./. y^^^^ ^^y^/^ . ^- ^ ^^ -^/^ ^^^, ^/ L^..zjpL 2 -TT. ^ r- .y _ r. -r . // . . C rr\ :zzz2~:z^ i <<.2 . ^./y /■ ^ /I "2^^" -^ IZIS :^r7x:5^;:?~Z2:7::Ei=2s:32 7^ 9-T^ :^ 4- 3.6 6 -3- -r-^ < '- oV- . . 2^7 ^ 2l^ ^^^^^"^-7 . ^^-^ - ^ -/ / ^- - ^' '=9-^-^ 7 ■J /u O ^^' 7 7 x" ^7/ ■^ 272 ^ ■' \ - ^T j/J -^ (rtP -^^^ TTv- -^ P\ --/ .- --/r.- ... P. ._ J^...w-^ .y^^ "<^ /(. C P^ ^ ^ - /^-/ ^ -H^ -57^ z I rr -r — -r-^ — 7— ->-_2,g_— iI 3 ■ r> . ^g — ^^ ■ -^ — ^-^ — <-^ -^ SZI 14 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. — cau be written with / upward or downward ; file (179) : fill (ISO) — notice the difference in the direction of/ in tliese two words : fool (181) — notice I placed low. Net (182) : gnat (183) —g is omitted: knit (184) : neat (185) — (186) and (187) the same two words witli medium t: nut (188). Bat (189) : rate (190) : right (191) : riot (192) : rut (193) : root (194) : rout (195), Debt (196) : date (197) : doubt (198). Deck (199) : Dick (200) : duck (201). Jl/mse (202) : mess (203)— notice that s is larger in mess than in maize : r)%ass (204) ; mice (205) : ')nuss (206) : moose (207) : moMse (208). i»/an (209) : men (210) : ?>iea?i (211) : mane (212) : moon (213). J/aid or made (214) : mad (215) : mid (216) : «ieed (217) : mud (218) : ??zood (219). Met (220) : «ri(//*i! (221) : mate (222) : mat (223) : ??ieei; (224) : 7nitten (225) : «iOO^ (226). Hat (227) : Aai-e (228) : height (229) : hit (230) : Aea^ (231)— /m^ and heat with medium ^ (232) and (233) : hut (234) : hoot (235). ^i«'eA: (236) : quack (237) : quake (238). Before we mention the logograms of this lesson, we must quote a few words which can- not be classed as such, but whicli are not written in strict accordance with the rules. H placed high reads naturally he (239) ; this sign stands also for him ; tlie context will readily decide wliich of tlie two is meant. In ivho (240), h is placed low and (silent) tv is omitted ; from tliis, hoiv (241) will be formed by shading h in low position. These words are formed irregularly, as the rule requires tliat the vowel-sound at the beginning or end of a word must be indicated or written, as will be illustrated in another lesson. The same applies to the following words : r for are (242) shaded and on the line should be preceded by an initial vowel-stroke (on the same principle as art) ; the same sign placed low and shaded will read our (243) ; n below the line and shaded (on account of the " ow" sound) reads now (244). Logograms. B below the line (on account of the " oo" sound) reads your (245), and represents the word in full with the exception of y. Medium t stands for to or too (246). But (247) : could (248) : such (249) : thus (250) : much (251) : must (252) : ivould (253) ; shoidd (254) ; you will notice that the low position of these abbreviations indicates the low vowel-sound of the word for which they stand. Notice, also, how the vowel-stroke follows the consonant in such and thits, show- ing that the vowel-sound in the word folloivs the consonant, and liow the preceding vowel- stroke in m^nst shows tiiat the vowel-sound precedes s in tliis word. These words show how important it is to place the logograms in their proper positions. Had (255) is represented by the final d, shaded on account of the " a" sound ; in accordance with a rule of the Reporting Style, this d is placed high to show that it is not the beginning of a word, but the final part ; the high position cannot imply an " i" sound, as the shading clearly indicates an "a" sound. Compare the length of tlie vowel-strolves in this (256) and these (257), where by high posi- tion and by the preceding vowel-strokes the vowel-sounds preceding final s are clearly indi- cated, so tliat in these words only th is omitted. You should now be able to read all the words up to this point without hesitation, or to write them correctly from the text (without looking at the shorthand sheet). If this is not the case, you should read them and write them until they appear as natural to you as though they were printed in type or as though you were writing them in longhand. Only then should you proceed to the following Reading Exercise. (258) Have they met the mate on that date ? They might not have met him. — Compare might and tnet ; also notice th shaded and followed by t in that. (259) These good men seem to be very dumb ; I fear they may meet a sad fate. (260) Tell the maid to get some fine linen right now ; we need the same for the sick sailor. — O in some has the sound of u in sum^ for which reason m is placed low. O in sailor is pronounced as though the word were written sailer, and is therefore replaced by the con- nective vowel-stroke, indicating a short e. (261) Tiie bark has a leak. (262) Could he let her hear the tune on the fiddle? — Her sounds just as though it were spelled hur ; r is therefore placed low. Double consonants are not written in shorthand (unless for the purpose of making some special distinction) ; for this reason only one d is seen in fiddle. { GRAPHIC SHOllTHAND. 15 (263) I should like to buy u ticket for the bout, but I do not care to meddle with the rifF-raff.— Observe ticket, where the vowel between k and t is sliown by the connective vowel- stroke. Also notice ivlth, — w connected witli th in higli position. Compare riff axuX raff. (264) That quack may kill the sick man. (265) How soon may your son have seen the rig? (266) Who could now do the same feat? (267) He said we nnist get at the root. (268) For such a big sum, we could not take the hou.se. (269) I should not let her look at the book. (270) The cat does not seem to like our white kitten.— As stated in Lesson 1, Ji is super- fluous in ivhite. (271) How much mutton do we need for our noon-day meal?— O in mutton has the short "e" sound. (272) Why should he sadden this affair with such a letter? (273) Better late than never may be very well, but better never late wouW seem to be a better rule. (274) The dude had such a vacant gaze that I had to laugh at him. — Oljserve the length- ened k in vacant; also ^shaded in laugh, where gh, sounding like/, is replaced by the latter. (275) Good air, as well as good care, might make him well. — To be very exact, the vowel-sound in as should be represented by shading ; but, as the word is .so frequent, and as the outline as written here cannot clash with anything else, shading need not be used. Writing Exercise. {The transcription will not appear in the following lesson.) (276) The man may be lame on the right leg. (277) I might not have the time for the fake sale. (-78) The less I say on the death case, the better for the minor. (279) Do not sigh like a babe ; be a man, (280) " Save your life for my sake," said the wife ; " they can- not let a sailor die like this." (281) "The letter cannot be made lighter," said the writer, when I sent tlie maid for the mail. (282) The label on the file may be a fake. (283) Dave does not like Mabel. (284) Let the men guess at a name for the racer. (285) My fame may amaze the maiden. (286) Can they reckon that much? (287) Can we never bake the cake on the fire? (288) They like a hay-ride on a fine moonlight niglit. (289) Fame may make men vain. (290) I desire five days' time. (291) I cannot take the time for the ride. (292) This does not seem to be a very quiet meal. (293) To whom could I liken the man ? (294) Give her a needle to darn the lace. (295) We must cart the beam away with the big wagon. (296) The wag made a bet with the tinsmith that he could fool the master. (297) A lug-a-l)ed cannot be a good business man. [Write each word .separately in lug-a-bed.] (298) Do not light the bad segar. 16 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Lesson No. 3. Since the method of representing sounds sj'mbolically is quite new to you, and since it is entirely unlike the usages of longhand, it is advisable to review the examples at length. At the same time we will consider the remaining consonants of the shorthand alphabet, which are for the most part large characters, reaching eitlier from the top- to the centre- line, from tlie centre- to the bottom-line, or from the top-centre-line to the bottom-line. The respective sizes of the various letters should be well observed. (1) shows the derivation of y ; the sign is placed on the line, so as to join readily with the following letter. No particular size is prescribed for tl:ie loop, which is made so as to connect easily with the following letter, as shown by year (2), yale (3), Yule (4), yarn (5) and yacht (6). (7) shows the derivation of p^ which (for the sake of convenience) can be traced down- ward or upward (7a), just like t and /. Note the ditference in the outline oi peck (8)— p and k joined, pick (9) — k placed liigh, pike (10)—^ and k joined by the i stroke, pack (11)— p shaded and puck (12) — k placed low. Note how clearly the vowel is thus shown. Compare also pile (13), peal (14), and pill (15) ; tap (16) and tape (17). Papal (18) shows p joined to p, expressing the " ay" sound between them. Notice d placed high in rapid (19). Compare paddle (20)— p shaded, and peddle (21) ; packet (22) and picket (23) ; the latter word shows again that the position is independent of the writing-line ; Ms on the same (imaginary) line as that on which the preceding k stands ; if t stood on the writing-line it would be in low position — (tliat is, lower than k) — and would therefore indicate an " u" sound. When p is followed by large t, the former must be shortened a little, so that t will not become confused with /; pet (24), 2J(itent (25), See how the vowel-sounds are clearly shown in cap (26), cape (27), keep (28), cup (29)^/j placed low (starting below the line), and coop (30). Compare also pen (31),pa?i (32),p/« (SZ), pine (34), pam (35), and pun (36). Note ape (37), apple (38), dapple (39), ripple (40), map (41), and type (42) — when y has the sound of "i," it is, of course, represented by the i stroke ; see also ripen (43). Observe how both p and r are shaded in parallel (44) — no double I is necessary ; watch the vowels in pair (io), par (46), peer (47), py7'e (48), 2}Oor (49), p«/* (50), p>ower* (51) ; and note 2^<^i''<^(de (52) — which sounds like pelade. Notice r shaded in park (53) ; and compare 2^<^ice (o4),poss (55), and 2^€ace or piece (56). As will be seen by the examples, when p is shaded, it must be traced down- ward ; as a rule, when p starts a word, it is preferable to trace the letter upward, so as to be on the writing-line to commence the following word. The sound of "sh" is neither an "s" nor an "h," and we therefore establish for it a distinct sign (57), which is quite a familiar stroke ; the sign starts with an upstroke, a little below the top-centre-line. Study carefully the examples ; also note particularly how these large signs are placed high or low ; s/^ape (58) : sheer (59) : share (60) : sure (61) — here s has an "sh" sound, and is, therefore, represented by the sh sign: lash (62): hash (63): hush (64) — note ch placed low : shy (65) : shun (66) : shine (67) : shake (68) : shut (69) : shoot (70)— notice the long vowel and the long vowel-stroke: shout (71): sheet (72) : tvish (73) — notice sh placed high : Jish (74) : dish (75) : nation (76) — sounds like nashn : ration (77) : parish (78) — note here how p is shaded, and how sh, though below the line, is placed higher than r, thus showing the preceding short " i" sound. Note also patient (79), rash (80), mash (81), mission (82), cash (83), session (84), and barouche (85). When ch has not the "k" sound (wliich is represented by k, as in chaos), it sounds like " tsh," and is represented by sh turned into the t position, as shown in (86). This is also a familiar stroke, which you have written many times ; chafe (87) : chaff (88) : couch (89) : catch (90): chain (91) : touch (92) : teach (93): beach (94): chair (95): char (96): cheer (97) : check (98): cheek (99): chuck (100): chicken (101): kitchen (102): thatch (103): ouch (104)— * When quickly uttered this word will sound like powr. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 17 notice how the initial vowel-stroke shows that tlie vowel starts tlie word, while the low position and shading of ch show that the vowel-sound in question is "ow." Nott- also ditch (lOo), liitch (106), witch (107), leech (108), jiitch (109)— compare the latter with tlie longer sound in peach (110), cheap (111), c//ayj (112), batch (113), match (114), and fetch (115). In words like leisure, s has a still diflerent sound from any of tliose found so far; it is somewhat like "sir' but is much softer; we therefore give the outline a "softer" (waved) appearance. Observe leisure (117), measure (118), azure (119)— note tlie long vowel-stroke for the long sound, vision (120)— see how well the second form of v is used here, seizure (121), and razure (122). When this sound is preceded by a sound akin to (", but softer, we swing it around into the t space, and it then represents the soft sound corresponding to "ch," — viz.: ./ ; the outline (123) is waved, of course. Compare the waved outline for the soft sound and the rigid outline for the hard sound in cage (124) and catch (125), rage (126) and wretch (127), ridge (128) and rich (129), and the latter with reach (130) ; note also cheer (131) and jeer (132), char (133) and jar (134). Further examples are jail (135), ledge (136), judge (137), budge (138), nudge (139), ivager (140), rigid (141), Jam (142), and gem (143)— when g has the soft sound, it is replaced by J ; if the g sign were used in (143) the outline would read game. Compare Jake (144) and Jack (145), age (146), edge (147), and etch (148): agent (149): jade (150). Note jag (151), jig (152), and jug (153) : Japan (154) : jay (155) : jealous (156). Com- pare jet (157), jut (158), and jute (159) : Jews (160) and choose (161). See also legion (162), page (163), and cudgel (164) — the latter sounding like cujl. It has been found advisable in practice to establish separate signs for a few very frequent combinations of consonants. (165) shows the sign for sjy; gasp (166): spy (167): lisp (168): whisper (169). Compare span (170), Spain (171), spun (172), s2DOon (173), spin (174), and spine (175). Observe how these large signs change their positions to indicate " i" (as in bit) or " u." Those reaching from the top- to the centre-line are brought a little below the centre-line when placed low, and their final stroke does not reach farther than the top-centre-line M'hen they are placed high. Those reaching from the top-centre- to the bottom-line are brought a little above the top-centre-line when they are placed high, and start at the centre- line when they are placed low. The medium characters (such as small t, b, w, etc.) are placed high by writing them half-way between the centre- and top-centre lines, so that the top-centre-line strikes them in the centre. When they are placed low the centi'e-line strikes them in the centre. Small characters {I, n, k, s, th) are written just below the top-centre-line when they are placed high, and just below the centre-line when they are placed low. The double consonant ng — a separate sound — has likewise a sign of its own, consisting of an n placed diagonally across the space occupied by ng, as shown in (175). Observe the examples /a??^ (1~"), finger (178), rang (179), ring (180), rung (181), spangle (182), bang (183), hang (184), gang (185), pang (186), bungle (187), jungle (188), young (189), hung (190), and sung (191). The sign for nk (192) is the same as that for ng, except that it is only half as large,— that is, about the size of k ; note the difference between rank (193) and rink (194), sank (195), sink (196), and sunk (197) : bunker (198) : kink (199) : link (200). Compare anchor (201) and anger (202), ankle (203) and angle (204). See also spank (205), tank (206), bank (207), and lank (208). The syllable ence, represented by (209), is a very familiar and convenient stroke ; when the sign is shaded, or placed either high or low, it is read with the vowel-sound ordinarily supplied by the shade or position ; hence (210) : sense (211) : since (212) : whence (213) : wince (214) : dense (215) : dance (216) : dunce (217) : ounce (218) : counsel (219) : cancel (220) : tinsel (221) : license (222) : fence (223) : chance (224) : denounce (225) : announce (226) : renounce (227), Logograms. In the sentence "sh said sh would do it," sh will at once be taken for she (228). Sp stands for speak (229), and j placed low (on account of the " u" sound) stands for just (230). Reading Exercise. (231) Benjamin Franklin could chain tlie lightning. Notice the shading of .; in Benjamin to show the "a" sound; the word lightning illustrates again the fact that the 2 18 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. position of consonants is merely relative and does not depend on the centre-line ; nrf is lilaced half above an imaginary top-centre-line of which the corresponding centre-line would be at the level of the preceding n. (232) I cannot catch a fish when I have not the right bait, but a big mackerel bit on my hook just the same. Notice the shading of m and k — standing for r;k in mackerel. (233) Kipling can write such a fine barrack ballad. The final ng in Kipling illustrates the rule mentioned in (231) about lightning. Notice in Kipling how closely I is joined io -p to preclude a vowel-sound between them ; notice the shading in barrack and ballad. (234) Does she like to dance to the rhythmic tune? Notice how in rhythmic — where h is of course omitted and y replaced by the short "i" — m is closely joined to the preceding th, thus precluding any vowel between tliem. (235) Spain has not much power ; she could not keep the filibuster back, I think. Notice how r in power is shaded and placed lower than p to indicate the ow sound : we write no w in tliis word, sivice we hear none. The word filibuster is a splendid illustration of the relative position of the letters in a word ; this is one of the points which give " Graphic" shorthand its superiority. L is placed high to indicate the " i " preceding, then b is placed high on account of the second " i " ; if the b wei'e in the normal position — that is, between the top-centre and the centre-lines — the word would read filebuster; the s is placed lower than b to indicate the sound in " bus". Notice how nicely s can be joined to t. (236) We have seen the picket line shoot. Notice in picket the short vowel-stroke between k and t indicating the " e ". (237) The queen wishes to thank the nation. (238) The tank may leak ; fill the i^itcher with the liquid ; then let the beverage cool. Notice with^ consisting of a %u and th placed high. (239) Tell father to sing a lullaby for the child. (240) Shut the book, I do not wish him to read when he should not be at leisure. (241) I wish that our manager would cancel the date for the dance. We call your atten- tion to manager and cancel. (242) Does he bet on such a chance gaine? (243) Let him touch the button ; we can do the rest. Notice the low position of t and the short vowel-stroke in button. (244) The mail may lose such a big package ; I am sure they can not deliver the same. (245) I wish we could catch the thief. (246) Good luck to the general. The word good illustrates an important rule, i.e., when there is no clash of meanings between words with "u" (as in mud) or "oo" (as in 7nood), no long connective-.stroke need be made in order to indicate the long sound, so that we can safely use the short (and time-saving) stroke in good, since there is no word sounding like "gud". Note how in general, j — standing for g — is conveniently joined to n by means of the loop. (247) When does the yacht sail? (248) Tlie rabble does not wish the j'oung leader to quell the riot. Writing Exercises. {The transcription tvill appear in Lesson Ji-). (a) I should like to cudgel the thief, (b) The.y must not take counsel, (c) Tell him I should like to have a cab. (d) I cannot run very well since I fell on the ladder, (e) This might be a good chance for her. (f ) Tell the lad to leave the room, (g) Do not let the adder bite the cub. (li) The cat does not touch a rat, but she can catch a mouse very well, (i) How can he act like such a child? (k) I have not seen the woman at the tub for a week. (1) Would he like to read the paper? {The transcription of the following sentences will not appear in the next lesson). (249) He wlio may never need counsel must be a wise man. (250) How can she let liim feel her anger like tliis, wlien he says that he cannot rai.se the cash just now ? (251) The sick tar had a pale look like a dead man when he came to our house, but the good air, as well as ^es^ ^^LAJJL^^.:,.^,^,:\ , ^ r I L ., V . . -e . /"'' ,/ ,r I I f . 'f . rt: ?M /,. i^^„. {" o' (^' 7 V T -> > ^=^ ^ 35" V/./w -" ~i=^--(^^- -^ 7 ^/'-/y^> V ? 7- / y- ^^^^^ ./ ./ / /- -^/-- / / I / T / 4 J / VY .^- / / t/S" /j"^. 7^ ^^ 2.^ fn^,. -y.^ ^ .^^. -^ ^^ ^;^. ^7 ^^ ..- ^ _^ 6.^ ^»J^ . ^ :f .y^ /f^/Z/r. ^ • ^^ " ^— -^^/^ . ^-^y^. V, 'J 6— a /^^.. y ■ -^^y.y^^y^y^^-^- "- < -.^.^.- . ^y S.3/ c/JL / c^rs .. -y2 ^^T^ 2^ ./ ^ r -;r^ n a -g/, <^ .L z^/ _. ^^2 AVole (14) and Paul (15), tvoe (16) and irar (17), icall (18), olioKe (19), though (20), and thaw (21). R and o (22) can be blended conveniently, but the r must be well and sharply accented (shaded) so as not to disappear in the curve ; note row (22) and raw (23). To s we simply add the o curve ; now (24) and auw (25) — for the sake of con- venience, o does not stand quite on the line in this case. This, like all other rules, need hardly be memorized, inasmuch as it is indicated by common sense and will suggest itself to the student. Note t and o ; toe (26) : toll (27) and tall (28) — double I is not written unless it is necessary to distinguish between short and long vowel-sounds, as in bail and bell. Signs Avith a left-hand curve readily absorb o and aw reversed in their curves. Note g and o; go (29); goal (30) and gall (31) — the "aw" sound being exjtressed by the icidened curve of g : hole or ivhole (31) and haul (32) — see how the I is joined to h. K and o blended become a medium sign (84) ; note coal (35) and call (36) : core (37). Observe the o and aw curves in show (38), shoal (39), and shawl (40). The ng sign absorbs the o stroke, as shown in (41) : see the difference between rang (42) and wrong (43) ; in the latter, the connective stroke between r and ng is vertical, admitting of the insertion of the reversed o before the ng stroke. The o can be more conveniently blended with r as shown in (43a), however, and the latter form is therefore preferable, for, although the outline is longer, it can be traced more rapidly, owing to the absence of the angle ; this word is a good illustration of the fact that the shortest outline is not always the speediest. Note long (44)— o absorbed in ng, and length (45). i^and o can conveniently be shortened by curving the/' in o fashion (46), making /oe: notice foal (47) and /a/^ (48). V, by means of a loop which it assumes, also absorbs o readily, as in vote (50) ; vault (51) shows that the aw curve must be written, as it could not be conveniently blended with a loop. Looped outlines, therefore, can be blended only with o, which they show by means of a icidened loop. (52) shows how ./ and are blended, reading Joe ; not Jake (53) and joke (54) : compare jaw (55) and Joe ^52). In sp, also, o is shown by the enlarged loop (56) ; compare sjoort (57) and s}nirt (58). Fand o (59) ; note yore (60) and yoeman (61). The pronunciation of o in such words as god, dog, etc., varies considerably in various sections of the country, and with it must also vary the short liand outlines fen- these words. For example, if ^od! is pronounced like "gawd" (62), the aw curve must be employed; if pronounced like " gad" (62a),— o sounding like "a" as in father,— d must be shaded. When o has this sound, which is a decided "a" sound in many instances, it must be written in accordance with the rule for this sound of a,— i.e., by shading the following consonant. Note tot (63) and taught (64), dot (65), dote (66), and date (67), Kate (68), cat (69), and cot (70). When t is shaded or changes position, the medium-sized (short) t must invariably be employed, and in words like cot this t cannot imply a long " a" sound, since there is no long sound of that sort in English. The initial use of o is self-explanatory ; oak (71) : ode (72) : 07nen (73) : obey (74). The sound of o as in ^ocp— practically a short " u" soujid, or in morf— a long " u" sound — has been explained in a previous lesson. 22 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Observe caught (75) and talk (76) ; gore ijl) and rogue (78) : compare check (79) with choke (81) / also coach (80) and choke (81) ; and the latter with chalk (82). The sign ko stands also for the prefix con (83) ; see how conveniently s can be joined to con: concise (84): consider (85): conceive (86): note content (87), where both ^'s are shortened a little to facilitate the outline ; contain (88) : conspire (89) : consequence (90) — see kw used for qu. Com is derived by tracing the final stroke of con with an m wave (91) ; commence {Q2.) : comment i^Z): commingle [^o). When we lower the voice as much as possible in pronouncing by, we change it to boy, so that "oy" is therefore represented by placing the i stroke low. Compare by (96) and boy (97) ; tie (9*8) and toy (99) ; file (100) and foil (101) ; ally (102) and alloy (103) ; line (104) and loin (104«) : joy (105) : coin (106) : foible (107) : i^oint (108) ; these words illustrate the logical rule that in order to place the i stroke low the preceding consonant must be placed low. Blended Consonants. We have seen in this lesson how two signs can be merged into each other without sacri- ficing the characteristic part of either, thus obtaining a speedy, yet easily legible, outline. This principle also applies to consonants when no vowel comes between them ; for example, if we join n and d by means of the connective vowel-stroke, the outline will read Ned (109), but if we blend n and d (110) by starting d with the n wave, we obtain nd. By this means, while nothing essential to d is sacrificed, n is also clearly apparent and we gain in sjjeed. The vowel-stroke preceding nd will make the word end (111) : note lend (H2) and land (113) : wind (114) : tend (115). In regard to blended letters, the following two rules hold good without exception, viz. : — (1) As to position, they must of course be counted as one, i.e., when one letter is aflTected by position the other must likewise be placed high or low, as otherwise the letters could not remain blended : for example, in bundle (116) not n alone, but nd, must be placed low to express the short " u" sound. (2) In regard to shading, however, only the one letter affected by the respective rule on shading comes into consideration ; in lard (118), for instance, where r and d ai-e blended by starting d with the r stroke, as shown in (117), only /■ is shaded to express the "a" sound, but in word, which is pronounced as though spelled ivurd, rd is placed low (119) ; compare this with weird (120). Note bird (121), beard (122), and bard (123) ; there is no " i" sound in bird, beard has a decided "ee" sound, and /• is shaded in bard to indicate the "a" : compare also heard. (124) and hard (125). D and r are blended by finishing d with the r stroke (126) : observe drum il27) and dream (128j : drunk (129) and drink (130) : drone (131) and drawn (132) ; see how the r is ac- cented in these Avords by shading, so that it clearly stands out before the o and aiv curves, as in row (22). Note the difference between drive (133) and derive (134) — no recognition is taken of the short " e" sound in prefixes (such as " de" and "re"). Ndr can be blended, without sacrificing the characteristics of either n, d, or r, by ending nd with the r stroke (135) ; this will not impair the legibility of the outline. The same principle applies to I'd and r (136) ; in this manner tender (137) is really spelled tendr (137a), which is just as legible. Note in retarder (138) the first /• of rdr shaded, and in murder (139) how i-dr is placed low ; see how nicely the letters join in sender (140) — sendr. S and t are blended by starting t with the s circle, as shown in (141) ; this initial stroke is made from right to left, and there is no danger of a clash with ih, since there is no combi- nation like iht. Care should be taken not to make the s circle too large. Stain (142) : stale (143) : stone (144) : the following words offer a good opportunity for voAvel drill : stack (145) — t shaded to express the "a" (as in cab) ; stock (146) — k shaded, since the sound is practically the same as in balm (except as to its duration) ; stcdk (147)— observe the aw curve between st and k ; stick (148)— note k placed high to show short " i" sound ; stake (149) — see the long k, which prevents the word from reading stcck ; stuck (150) —k placed low gives the short " u" sound. Compare the p and b in staj^le (151) and stable (152) : steer (153) : steel (154). Tand /• are blended by ending t with the r stroke (155) ; obser\'e how tlie angle is done away with, by blending into a curve : train (156) : trim (157) : trend (158) : compare try (159) and tray (160) ; observe the shading of r in tramivay (161). From the foregoing it will be seen that st and /• may be blended by ending st with the r stroke (162) : strain (163) : strive (164) : note how r is accented in stroll (165), straiv (166), and in strong (167). In the second form (167«) of this word, o is absorbed by ng, but, for reasons given under wrong (43), the Lesson 4. -Of, t^ jqL ^^ ^^ '"^ I ^ ■ — / Ct* 7 =?^ I ^ ^ I *i g / /■ — ^ ^J ' * ** J. ^ TJL £. ^ YZlcr^ ^=^^^ J, /Ya s 2^ /-^-' o :^ ^;7^ -^ , if / J a -^ (y o ^yIZ ^-^ .-CL ,.^-7 ^ ^. ^ ^ j /r^ , ;) ^ /^ -^ ^^ . /. ^ f^ ^ y- J I r- . r^ ^ ^ Z ^ ry V V '^ / '-^'"^ jj :2. 7^ .. >^^ 7-^ = r//y; / ^^ . A /> / > A ^ ^ . . . . ?-7 .^ /~^^ r--» ^^ Z ztzli 2: ^LS Tzrr T=n=i 30 J. LtQ P_y g^^-^.^^ ^_^ >^^ /»^ >-»^ .i-,...f.(, ( , u"^-,n 'i^i--T^ ssr fo VS" r^-t^ -n r^r r^ r^ ^r'U'i?. ^ --^. j\. j^.^v A. y\../v JI'.^^J'LlLt' Jh-^ ^ A rfTT 3 r"y^r 1 " i^ - ^^ ^ Ts- 3 7" <^ ^y / ^ /-v/ /^ 2 "xt:^ ^ /^ ..^/^-y^^ r>^^^^-;^r^ //^ '>L >^ ^^. = ^<| '^d^ (^_ ^(^^ c ifi.[r..nrj ns ii^ P^^ ^ ^..-P )S-,.-.^ M- inp^-h> l\> i<^a //y) fix /^ •/•/'! •1' . U .gT , ^ >g /^^ Pa ^ .L.^ Si , if' S- g if V -^ . c -t: A^..^/^ = .^ j: n ^ :^ TTC '10 D /T ? ^ / TP ^ ^^^ ^y ^ JL^ -^ 9_ >» ;^„ , ^ r ,< A./ ^ J\ ^z. , Cj/2r, , 6 L /X/\ n 'U . 9^^ l/f-^. ru\ fi^^r^ ^y^ ., ./U l - C. 7. Al~ T ^ ■ Co-i % iL.^\'^ L , .fi^ ' 'J\ In J. ^ .. .ji.Th^^f.- n /I ? r nt ^ZZZ^ZZ 24 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. first form is better: compare (167a) with (168) strength— notice how couveniently the final th is joined to the 7ig. The initial vowel-stroke preceding s stands for the vowel-prefix "a" or "e".(when the latter has the short "a" sound) ; examples are astride (169), estate (170), esteem (171), and astonish (172)— where o has the sound of a as in calm. Logograms. The logograms of o are almost self-explanatory. On the line it stands for of (173) : aw apj) roaches the medial sound of ivas (174), and standing above the line represents that word. You will notice that medial and final abbreviations are placed above the line to indicate that they do not begin the word, except in cases where they are placed low to indicate the " u" sound. Aw on the line stands for all (175), from which although (176) is formed by adding though to the word-sign : s is omitted in also, aw and o being joined (177). As shown above, o can be turned around for the sake of convenience, and we do this in the word so (178), which is written in full ; compare this with the verb sow (24). Always (179) is formed by joining aw and w. Ko, when standing alone, represents course (180) ; of course (181), con- sists of of and couise joined. In alone (182) only the n is dropped. Often (183)— where t is silent — is represented hy fn. Over (184) is a shortened upward v — admitting of the o curve- joined with r. M above the line is the last part of them (185), for which word it stands. Among (186) is represented by n^^ placed low, indicating the " ung" sound. Fes (187) is y and s blended, and yet (188) is t with the y wave. What (189) is a shaded iv. You will now be able to translate without difficulty the following Reading Exercise. (190) Was this the fiend who found the fund the miser was so fond of? Yes, he was among those men whom the watchman caught long ago ; I have heard the policemen talk of the matter. — Note how the respective vowel-sounds are expressed in fiend — nd placed high, found— nd placed low and shaded, fund — nd placed low, /'o»d— which is an "a" sound, nd shaded to indicate the "a" sound. Notice the o curve between th and .s- in those, and see how o is absorbed by the ng wave in long. Observe the initial a stroke and the o curve in ago. In x^oUcemen, note how closely s — standing for c — and m are written together to preclude any vowel-sound between them. (191) A pint of milk with a pint of wate? must give a quart of milk ; this we might call the main point of the milk business. — Note the words 2yint and 2)oint ; in the latter / is placed low to indicate the " oi" sound : notice the aw curve in water and quart. (192) She never saw this kind of locomotion. — Observe the three o's in locomotion, the last syllable " tion" being, of course, written as shen ; the word is written thus, lo-co-mo-shen. (193) We may vote for the measure to let the children have more leisure, I heard the minister whisper. — See how closely I and dr are joined in children, to preclude any vowel- sound between them. Observe the difference between sj in ineasure and leisure, and s}) in whisper ; sp having a straight down stroke, while sj starts with a waved down stroke (it is practically a j turned into the sh position). Note in minister the s placed higher than the preceding consonant to indicate the second " i". (194) Go, tell the boy not to start the old topic. — Observe how in start both fs are shortened a little and the st is traced upward ; the word could also be written by starting st on the top-centre-line and tracing it as far as the centre-line, then connect the r (on the line) by means of a vowel-stroke, and trace the second t upward, which will make it full length. This outline is, however, much longer than the one given on the plate. In topic, o has the " a" sound and ji is, therefore, shaded. (195) I can always listen to the "Old Oakei/ Bucket".— Note hoAV ^' is placed low in bucket. (196) No word but the one we told him could hurt him more. See how one is written ; we could write the sound more faithfully by following ?<^ with the o curve, and then shading n, which would give us the sound " woan(e)". However, it is safe enough, and much shorter, to write the word as on the shorthand sheet, tv and n placed low. (196a) Show her this coat once more ; then she might not want the jacket, said I, for I know her foible well. — Note once, which is written on the same principle as one ; w followed by o and the ence stroke shaded would be a more faithful representation, but the other way is just as safe and much shorter. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 2.5 (197) Washington could not oppose the war feeling of the colonies. — The first o in colonies sounds like "a" (in calm) and the second is scarcely audible; the word sounds practically like " colenies". For this reason t is shaded, and the second o is replaced simply by the conuective-vowel-stroke, representing the short "e" sound. (198) Napoleon was the hero of France. — Note in Napoleon that I and the second o are not blended, the connective-stroke between them representing the short "e" sound. Observe in hero the r placed high and blended with the following o. (199) We were awestruck by the silence of the Kremlin. — Notice in awestruck how the aw curve and the st are blended conveniently. (200) Put your hat on the rack, not on the rocking-chair. — Observe tlie r shaded in rack to represent the " a" (as in man) sound, and the k shaded in rocking on account of the short "o" sound. (201) I always like a candid word, but I hate a hot-headed man.— Note the difference between hate, hot, and headed. (202) The loss of respect for the laws of the State must cause a nation to totter. — See the difference between loss and laws, the former having a sharper sound, and therefore a larger s than the latter. Notice the shading of the second t in totter. (203) The offence of the officer was that he would not shoot the offender on the spot. — Note offence, offender, and officer — s placed high in the latter. (204) Why don't they join the mob? said the king. — There is, of course, no apostrophe used in don't. See the b shaded in mob. Before you begin to practice the following Writing Exercise be sure that you can write all the numbered words of the text correctly and rapidly, without the aid of the lesson sheet. (a) Does the widow mourn much ? (b) Has her father bought the boat ? I do not know, I have not read the paper, (c) To judge bj'^ the coat I saw the old man wear, he does not seem to be rich, (d) He would not dream of such trouble, but I gave him warning, (e) Tell the maid to leave the door open, (f ) Does he consider the consequence when he may start the ball rolling? (g) I told him so ; yet he said he must go over alone, although the stroll might end with a murder, (h) The rogue does not want to go home. X Lesson 5. ^v^v^. A.. . I ') J .. c J^u'^ y ^. L.. X') /jrz~: T iM (y n /\L (^^ Q. .J I L _ 7^/-///^. -if- 6 H u 'M ^( ..r-' L.y/ /-i.r .^ .^e ^ri r.frv9 c ^t I ^-QT zJ^. :l x^ f^f tf zz -^ -<-^ — ^ ^ -/^V ^j^^/^/../y^/c^y-;"7^ ^ /o 'H ^.(^,r^^j\fv,t N/\; ^v rs -f- s -- rx ^. ^ -s" "^sr V ;io g/N =Q 12: \£^ 4n = Vo ^^^yj 4, /V ^ xs;. ^ + ^ -"a 3o "5T -^--i »-C; z-^^ -TT t,.\ /. -M /'/\ I'X L 'U.-.1'L. r~ 'L . Ul h .-, '/') /A.. Z,J S-o ex. rr C t^- ( (^ /^ i^ IX\A ^ ^i 'L C ^ K -tJ - ) w^ rJ^ r\^ vy J t. --f^J 86 /)J ^^ u-ai/JJ^., ,-.7 (^( ^ k (y?. ^l J- [''■ c /oo '0S~ /fO r>S -ts ^ 4 :p ' u. -i 7. Ajr /3-0 12-S- l3o /3J- ..^-.^ ^ /T'/^ ^ f:^^A -/ ---7 ^^^-A ^^^ ^yi'^z y.r.Qoj. ~d^ — " ■ ■ -o\ i¥S- ^c"/:cja^:^'^'c 6 /so 6^ (W) r\t r^ - /7^ rr^ gv-A ,- zz^^isiz ;// '■v; o X/fTV L>*. ^^2-n^ T' / "^ ^- )d^ ^ " ^"^ -^ C/lv^ g^ C- / U>/ ^ / o A w r, / C I L^J < O '^~ ^ ^ GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 27 Lesson No. 5. (On the shorthand sheet will be fouud the transcription of the writing exercise to Lesson No. 4; this is the last lesson to be so transcribed. Compare your outlines carefully with those on the sheet, making such corrections as are necessary, and studying anew the rules under which the respective corrections are treated. Bear in mind always the fact that, though the system is easy, it cannot be acquired without earnest effort and systematic practice. To attain the best results, you should make it a rule to take up no new M-ork until the old has been thoroughly assimilated.) As mentioned before, only the ordinary writing line is used in shorthand after the student has become accustoined to the respective proj)ortions of the characters. You are now so far advanced in this respect that we are justified in dispensing with the top- and the bottom-line, retaining only the line and the centre-top-line. However, if you do not feel sufficiently sure without the omitted lines, do not fail to rule them on your practice sheet, for it is very important that the outlines be made correctly. BLiExded Consonants {continued). Looking at the word Kremlia in sentence (199) of the previous lesson, you will notice how /• is joined direct to k (1) ; this rule, like all those pertaining to the blending of conso- nants, is so logical that it need hardly be memorized. The /• stroke of this combination will of course come below the line, but no u sound can be inferred from this position, since the absence of the vowel-stroke between the consonants plainly precludes any vowel-soumi between them : crime (2) — e being of course replaced b^' k ; note creak (3)— second k placeil high and lengthened, and crook {\)—kr placed low. Observe how kr is placed high in creed (o), which compare with crude (6). R preceded by a short vowel-sound is the most frequent final syllable in English words, and as the vowel-sound is scarcely audible, it may be omitted, blending the r with the consonant preceding it, as shown in baker (7)— observe the long k, and cracker (8) — note the shading. When kr is followed by o, as in crow (9), the o — as shown by ko in Lesson 4 — is absorbed by ^/ compare this outline with core (10). The same prin- ciple is applied in the case of "aw" ; for example, craw (11) and crawl (12). When an initial vowel-sound precedes kro, its initial stroke is to be raised, in analogy with the case of act (see Lesson 2, No. 24) ; this is illustrated by across (13). With the other small characters r is blended in a similar manner. For example, when the th circle is complete, the outline is continued to form an r, so that the character for f/ir (14) ends likewise under the line: thrive (15) : threat (16) : thrash (17) — note the shading of r. Mother (18), in wliich the o has the short u sound, is contracted to muthr, r being blended with th; see also how th is shaded and blended with r in rather (19). B and th (20) are logically blended by starting th with the ;• stroke ; as shown in north (21)— note also how n and the aw curve are joined : berth or birth (22)— see rth placed low ; farther (23)— note the shading of the first r and the blending of rthr. R and .s are blended by ending r with the s circle, as shown in (24) : matters (25) : tears (26)— observe how rs is placed high. As we have previously seen, no recognition is made of the vowel-sound of the prefixes de and re ; we are therefore justified in omitting the vowel- stroke in this case, thus shortening receive to rceive (27), which is just as plain. The difTer- ence between rs and rth is well illustrated by the words ivorse (28) and worth (29), foi'ce (30) and forth (31). R and r are blended by adding the first r at the top of the second, thus making a middle- length sign (32). This enables us to shorten hearer (33), analogous to tender: demurrer (34) — note double r in both cases, in the latter, placed low. Observe tlie difference lietween tearcr (35) and terror (36) ; in the latter word, just as in ordinary script, the double con- sonant is employed to indicate the sharp, short vowel-sound. 28 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. O aud r (37) are blended by adding /• to the final stroke of ^, continuing in tlie direction of the final stroke, in order to avoid an angle : grain (oS) : green (39) — see long n phiced high : groan (40)— observe the o absorbed by g. Tiger (41) shows liow gr is employed finally. When placed high tlie outline will of course reacli almost to the centre-line, while g placed high will not reach down so far : grim (42). To write rg (43), r/ is started with the /• stroke. The r in bargain (44) is also shaded on account of the " a" sound. The vowel-sound in the prefixes de and re being ignored, we can conveniently shorten words like regain (45) and regale (46), to rgain and rgale. Notice rgr in regret (47), which is spelled rgret ; observe that t in this word is partly retraced over the gr. B and r (48) are blended b.y adding r to b in a manner analogous to the Ijlending of /■ and gr, but at the beginning of b in the direction of the initial stroke ; just as h is the reversed g, so hr is the reversed gr. Note the difference between broom (49) and boom (50) — also observe the long vowel-stroke in these Avords and the low position of m : compare bright (51) and bite (52). See how neighbor (53), in which no "o" is audible, is contracted to neighbr (53a). B and b are blended by simplj^ joining them without any intervening vowel-stroke, so that the change of position cannot imply a vowel-sound : m^arble (54) — observe the shading of r ; ivarble (55) — notice the aw curve. B aud V are blended by writing the second form of v (see Lesson 2, 54a) downward and starting it with the r stroke (56) : carve (57) — note the shading of r: nerve (58) and curve (59) — note rv placed low ; see in reserve (60) rs aud rv blended, and the latter placed low. Fand r (61) are blended in the usual manner, by joining r direct to the first (waved) form of v, so that the outline is prolonged below the centre-line : rover (62) — spelled rovr : cover (63) — note vr jjlaced low, since the o has the short " u" sound. Care should be taken to curve the final part of v well to the left. B and rn (64) are blended in accordance with the usual rule applied to letters with curves, that is, by starting the ?/i with the r stroke : note the difference between form (65) and foam (66) : storm (67) : warm (68). Observe the initial vowel-stroke jireceding the shaded r in orm (69), to show that the voivel-sound begins the zvord. Words like remain (70) are, of course, shortened to rmain (70a) : remind (71). Observe the difference between r and 6, blended by means of a sharp angle, and r and m, blended by means of a curve. M and r are blended by changing the final curve of 7n into the r stroke (72) ; by this means we obtain a brief outline for the final syllable mer as in steamer (73), spelled steamr ; compare this with streamer (74) : hammer (75). Bmr is merely the sum of the two rules above, and is formed by starting and finishing m with the r stroke : warmer (76) : armor (77) : murmur (78) — note rmr placed low. In this case the initial and final strokes of m must of course be parallel, since they both represent the same letter, r. None of these outlines, rg, rm, rmr, etc., is difficult to make, if you bear in mind that the character is begun or ended with the r stroke ; the form will then come naturally. Medium t and r (79) are blended by adding r to t at the beginning and in the same direc- tion as the t stroke, so that tr starts above the top-centre-line. Like medium t, medium tr cannot be used initially : penetrate (80) : concentrate (81)— note how in this word the vowel- sound between n and t is precluded by retracing t over the connective vowel-stroke, Avhich is thereby eliminated ; the same applies to electric (82). The final use of tr is illustrated by ivaiter (ivaitr) (83) and traitor (84) : observe the difference between latter (So)— I shaded— and later (86). P and r are blended by finishing p with the r stroke (87) ; when this character is used initially, and initially only, it is 7-educed to a medium sign (87a), of course retaining its shape. In all other cases the long sign must be employed : jyroud (88)— note d placed low and shaded, expressing the "ow" sound: prw??e (89)— observe the loug n placed low, on account of the long "oo" sound : j^rimer (90)— ^jr placed high : prime (91) : print (92) : taper = tapr (93) : paper (94) : reprieve (95). See how the second pr is shaded in proper (96), to express the "a" sound of o ; observe how the r is accented in propose (07) and how conve- niently the second syllable is joined to the first. The outline for ^j/'o cannot be mistaken for wro ; for shorthand purposes, there is no ivr in English, since iv in that combination is always silent, as in wrong, write, etc. B and/) are blended by joining them without a connective vowel-stroke, as in war}) (98) and sliarp (99)— observe the r shaded in the latter. F and r are likewise blended by joining them without a vowel-stroke; this rule is so GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 29 self-evident that the combination has already been employed in previous lessons. When the vowel-sound "ay" (long or short) occurs between /and r, the connective vowel-stroke must be employed, and / must therefore be written downward ; note the difference between fair (100) and fra^ (101) : ferret (102), freight (103), and fret (104)— here a short vowel-sound ("ay") must be read between //• and t, since blended letters count as one (see rule under 37, Lesson 1) : freeze (105) : friend (106). Fr can also be traced downward, as in heifer (107), really spelled hefr. Sh and /• (108) are blended by tracing the downward part of the initial stroke of sh in the /• direction ; compare shr in shriek (109) — where long k is placed high — with ah in shake (110) : note the same difference in shrive (111) and shave (112). jB and sh are blended by omitting the connective vowel-stroke between them ; for this Ijurjjose the initial stroke of sh must be brought down to the line, so that in this case sh duos not reach the top-centre-line as shown in marshal (113) and harsh (11-4)— since the vowel- sound of this word is already expressed by the shading of r, no vowel-stroke is necessary between sh and r. Compare sh in the latter word with the same sign in fresh (115), where it is joined with /■ by means of the connective vowel-stroke. Sjy and /■ (116) are treated according to the same rule as sh and /•, i.e., the initial stroke (which is written downward) is traced in the /• direction : note the difference between sixr in sprat/ (117j or sjori/ (118), and the sj) in sjjij (119). (S' blends also very conveniently with the other consonants with which it occurs ; with k, for instance, by starting the latter with the s circle (120). Of course, when s is used initiallj-, its initial stroke is always omitted. Observe the difference between scale (121) and skull (122)— it is not necessary to write double I in the latter word, the short vowel-sound being indicated by the short connective stroke between sk and /. Note disc (123) — sk high, desk (124)— 6-A- on line, and dusk (125)— sA; low. See how skr in describe (126) is formed by start- ing kr with the s circle ; observe the difference between sA-/m (127) and scream (128). iS' and s are blended by making the s circle larger, so that it becomes a medium character, representing the short syllable ses (144)— when in normal position, .s/s— when placed high, and ,sws— when placed low : j^ossess (145) : pieces (146) : system (147) : sustain (148) : assist (149) — note the initial stroke : sister (150) : note the difference between i^rice (151) and p)rices (152) — the latter word (like pieces) shows that this large s circle is a brief way of expressing the plural of words. It cannot be used, however, where the "s" sound is soft, as in prizes. Sw (153), formed by starting iv with the s circle, cannot be confounded with d, as you will see by comparing swell (154) and dcde (155), swim (156) and dim (157) ; care should be taken not to make the .s- circle too large. Chr and jr do not occur initially, but, when contracted, they form a brief final syllable. Chr can be conveniently blended by ending eh with the r stroke, as shown in stretcher (158) and pitcher (159)— see how chr is placed high in the latter word. To J, ending in a waved line, /• must be joined without a connective vowel-stroke, thus reducing ledger to ledjr (160) : dodger (161)— note the J shaded, owing to the " a" sound of o. In the reverse case, r and ch and /• and,/ are blended by starting them with the r stroke, as shown in (162) and (163) ; observe the difference between ;)«/Y7i (1(U) and porridge (165)— in the latter word note the connective vowel-stroke between ;• and j, also the shading of r, owing to the "a" sound of o, and the high position of./ to express the short "1" sound. Note search (166) and serge (167) ; see how in sergeant (168) r is shaded — as ser is pronounced 3U GRAPHIC SHORTHAXD. sar — and blended with j, and how conveniently n is joined to the latter by means of a loop, which is always employed when n joins a waved line ; r in this word is not to be considered as placed high, since it is absorbed by j (which stands for the soft sound of g). If the word was pronounced like surgeant, rj would of course have to be placed low. To the stroke for ence, r is joined in the same manner as to j : dancer (169). In the preceding lesson we have seen how « and long t ai'e blended ; s and medium t are blended in a similar manner, as shown in (170), but the sign cannot be employed initially, just as in the case of medium /. This combination is also used to difierentiate between the long and the short vowel-sounds ; note how it is connected with the preceding consonant in tante (171) and test (172), leant (173) and IL'it (174), waist or ivante (175) and West (176). lacing of z by s in zone, the shading of k in Cancer and of x> i'l Tropic. The word Capricorn illustrates how well Graphic Shorthand is able to write names ; notice the shaded k, followed by pr, the latter connected with ko, placed high to indicate the short " i" sound. (196) The preface of the professor praises the process, but says the electrical one may penetrate the metal better. — Observe the diflference between preface and professor, praises and process, the ses circle in the latter being shaded, owing to the "a" sound of o ; if the word is pronounced like pro-cess, o having the same sound as in go, the o curve must be employed. Note how the connective vowel-stroke is omitted between k and t in electric to preclude the vowel-sound, while it is shown between n and t in peiietrate, to indicate that the vowel-sound is to be inserted. (197) The speaker was a senator from Kansas.— Note in speaker, long k blended with r placed high. Look at the word senator, wliich, in accordance with the pronunciation, is written senetr, employing the medium tr for a convenient ending. See how advantageously the ence stroke is employed in Kansas; the second syllable of this word sounds like ses, and no shading is tlierefore necessary. (198) "We should protect the cruiser with a strong armor," said the commander of the torpedo boat, to the crowd. — Observe the word protect, where eacli t is shortened (on the GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 31 same principle as start was written). Notice how the r is brought out clearly in ^>/-o (of jrro- tect) and in strong: note the shading of m and the blending of ndr in commcmder, and the d placed high in torjiedo. (199) Hoist the streamer to the highest point. — Note the difference between hoist, where the consonant preceding the i stroke is placed low, and highest, where medium t {sf) fol- lowing the i stroke implies a short vowel-sound preceding it. (See Lesson 2, No. 10). (200) We regard this matter a criminal offence, so guard the rascal well ; they should not grant a pardon to the culprit ; such men deserve the gallows. — Compare regard and guard; note kr placed high in criminal, k placed low and t placed high in culprit. (201) The torture of thirst may cause fever, but the fervor of the heroes does not decrease after the crisis. — Note rehr in torture, see rst placed low in thirst ; compare fever — vr placed high, with fervor — rvr placed low. See how the sis circle is placed higli in crisis. In the subsequent lessons no more shorthand transcriptions of Writing Exercises will appear, and you are therefore urgently requested to send in for correction the following Writing Exercise. (202) Do not cast thy bread on the waters. (203) A cover of snow hid the ground from the eyes ; the pond was frozen ; I could not hear the murmur of the brook, or the warble of a single bird ; the grove was silent like a grave. (203a) I found no trace of spring ; perhaps winter may last longer than we think. [Do not forget to shade n and place nd low in ground, to shade the n of nd in x>ond — " a" sound of o ; accentuate well the r in frozen, place rmr low in murmur, also k in brook ; note the difference between grave and grove — o in the latter being absorbed by the initial g curve] (204) The storm tore the streamer from the mast of the schooner, wave after wave sent the spray of the brine over the deck, so that we were all driven down to our cabin. (205) "We must reach our aim by hook or crook," was the order given by the leader of the robbers. [In robbers shade the b — "a" sound of o, and blend the final r.s]. (206) Tell the waiter to serve the dinner at the table that I told him to reserve for the guest. (207) At the present stage of the matter the defence can have no chance to win ; but I think the game cannot be worth the candle. (208) The wounded man was brought home on a stretcher after the doctors had found that he had broken a leg. [Use a long n, blended with d in wounded ; o will fit in easily between br and k in broken}. (209) We propose to assist the marshal to keep order. [Place k high in keej)}. (210) The tiger was the cause of much terror to the village, but a rifle-ball from a sharp- shooter brought death to the beast, relief to the village. [In shooter use the long connective stroke and place medium tr low ; place the sj'llable rcl high in 7-elicf}. (211) Tell the tailor to baste the coat with the best thread he can buy. (212) A sick rooster does not crow. (213) Remind father that he should prune the trees of our garden. (214) Do not let j'our brother brood over the hard luck he had. [Use long connective stroke and place d low in brood]. (215) Grim war cannot be worse than the rule of this tyrant. [In tyrant no shading is necessary, "a" having a very short sound]. (216) We have a fine pitcher on our i^ase ball team, but we need a good catcher. (217) "We despise a spy, but we need him," said the proud, brave commander. [Use the sign for .sp in des2)ise'\ (218) The man who can tortui'e a live creature must be a brute. [Remember the chr sound in torture and creature']. Lesson 6. ^ "^ ^ V^/ "" ^^^^ ^ " ^ ^ ^'^ ^^^ ^ V '^^ ' ^ "^ "^ ^^^ - ^ ^ y ^ n ') /^y^ ^9 o /r-. 'J c^. /r- ^ ^^ yj' . - r-s.. ^.^. Let -W^ O <^ . 2= tf ' ^^^ ^yg /— ^-r< c=w^ C2 L » - ^ O/ - ( w^ y^ ^y U) -w^ o <^y — a- ^--^^ — .? ( V> ^ ^ ^ o . '^ ( J^ '' r . y' ^^ X - r; ^" "ZT ^ "^ ^- " ' — / "* V ^ .. / . /v ^ ^^r^ ^ '>> ^i' ^ /^^-^ c ^ n ^ ^ ^ ^ / r: C4 (T /.^ / r. A ^ -r^. ^ ^! ., .. - v^. iiL <^ a- (.yj. / /y^'' ^ /y ^^ / ^ ^Vv^ >. < / /f .^ ^^/ ^^> ' >fe^ 7 ^^ / . -^ x7^ ' '>^^ '^' ^ ' "y"^ . ^V^^ - ^/ ,.-zia.x.,.-i:l^ ^^^w (I ^,^^»^ ^ -^ • ^ ^ <^ ^-^ ^ . ^/ '^ / > ,^ / "' , ""^ v/^ ^ - y€ ^^^ ' "^'^^ -- ^-^.-> ^ ^ Wf^y /. Sy' /^ n^ ^\'^-- --c^^-l / ..In ^^\: y^ , r// /w, ^ -r^ , —- --c^^ ^ /,^, -:e. r-^J? . ^ ^' ^ ^ •^'^'^ " 7" /y^ ^~^ "^ — —Si- a ^^yC- = — -^ GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 33 Lesson No. 6. In the preceding lessons we have learned how to express the majority of the vowel- sounds (with the exception of those of u, as in fume) when they occur medially. This lesson will afford reading material embodying these vowels ; the examples given should therefore be carefully studied. (1) What may be sport for a wicked boy may cause much pain to a poor bird. — Note how the o in sport is shown by the enlarged sp loop, which has absorbed it. See also how r in 2^oor is placed lower than p. (2) I saw the cat act like a sneak ; I think she has done away with the milk.— Compare cat and act; see how the initial vowel-stroke clearly indicates that the latter word starts with a vowel-sound. (3) Have they ever seen a pipe made from a corn-cob ? — Observe how well the i stroke is shown in pipe, and how nicely it can be joined with both p'a. In cob, o has the " a" sound, which must be shown by shading the following consonant. (4) The police could find no trace of the murder ; they saw no blood-stain on the tall pole, althougli Paul had told them so. — Compare aw in fall and o in fo/cl; also, pole and Paul. If it is desired especially to emphasize the fact that Paul is a proper name, the out- line may be underlined. (5) We must steer the boat so that she can go with the tide as well as with the wind ; thus alone can we avoid the shoal ; I consider this the best course. — This sentence shows well how conveniently o blends with letters ending with a right-hand curve, and how well it is absorbed, when reversed, by letters with a left-hand curve ; compare sh of she with s/io in shoal ; also bo in boat, and go in go. (6) The bell rang at the 'phone. — As double consonants are used only for purposes of distinction, double I in bell may well be omitted. It is hardly necessary to mention that an apostrophe is superfluous in 'phone and that ph is replaced by /. (7) Does the child know how cocoa grows? — You will have observed that ko has two meanings, — viz., co or ko as in cocoa, or the prefix con; the two will not clash, as will be found in practice. Koko could not be concon, as there is no such word. (8) We should always say a kind word to a helpless man ; a kind thought may be good, but the word cheers him ; yet a kind deed does more good than both. — See how close together I and p are placed in helpless, thus precluding any vowel-sound between them. Notice also rs in cheers, and see how the long vowel-sound in deed is well shown by the long connective vowel-stroke. (9) Maud says the dress shows neither taste nor style. — See how the long sound in taste is shown l)y the use of tlie medium st, thus admitting of the use of a long connective vowel- stroke. If large t were used in this connection, the word would read test. (10) Those who have at heart the welfare of the town should vote for the rapid transit bill.^See how the short " i" sound in transit is shown by the high position of t. No double I is necessary in bill, since beal has no meaning, and there can be no clash. (11) What kind of chromo do they give with the spices? — When ch has the sound of k it is, of course, replaced by k, whicli is here blended with r and at the same time has absorbed the 0/ see also how o is well shown at the end of the word, and how readily it can be joined to m. Note how the plural is shown by the use of the .se,s circle in spices. (12) I doubt that they ever were on your side ; for they are our men. — This sentence shows the five logograms formed by r : above the line for were ; on the line for ever ; below the line for your ; on the line shaded for are ; and below the line shaded for our. See also medium t placed low and shaded in doubt, where b is silent and therefore omitted. (13) The forester broke a sprig from the hedge. — O has the "a" sound in forester, and r is therefore shaded ; see how the vowel-sound preceding sir is shown by the connective vowel-stroke. See also how the r is shown in sprig by the initial part of s/j. 3 34 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. (14) We ought to resent the recent speech of the orator.— Note the difference between recent and resent : in the former, the first syllable is not accented, and we may therefore blend r and s, writing rsent ; in the latter, s is placed high, clearly showing the "ee" sound of the syllable. See how conveniently medium tr can be used in oretr (spelled in accordance with the sound). (15) Have they made an analysis of the water?— Note the word analysis, and see how well the last syllable is represented by the ses circle placed liigh, indicating at the same time the short " i" sound preceding. (16) Have tliey ever ridden a chainless wheel or tried a tandem?— No double d is necessary in ridden. (17) The brave sailors had to grope their way to the powder-room to get the grape-shot. — No o is audible in sailors. Compare grope with grape. O has the "a" sound in shot, and t must therefore be shaded. See also how dr is placed low and shaded. (18) With a firm grasp the man took the grappling iron. — Notice the shading in gr. Also rm placed low in firm. (19) The sharp-shooter had target practice all week. — Observe r shaded and blended with g in target. Note tr placed low in shooter, also the long vowel-stroke, indicating the long "u" sound. It might be said here that tr is not very plain; but even if the outline is written carelessly it -tnust read sharpshoot, and can hardly be taken for anything else. (20) One swallow does not make a summer. — Note mr placed low in summer. (21) Do they wish to arbitrate the matter or to prolong the quarrel ? — See how r and b are blended in arbitrate, and how shaded r is preceded by the vowel-stroke ; compare tr with t in the last syllable of the word. Notice how well o is shown preceding and following I in prolong. See also the clear outline for quarrel. (22) The supply of an article should not exceed the demand. — In supply p is shortened a little, as is usual when the identity of the / stroke sliould be preserved. See also how the ini- tial vowel-stroke precedes shaded r in article. Both vowels are also clearly shown in exceed. (23) What brand of cigars does he smoke? — Note s placed high and r shaded and blended with the second s in cigars. (24) The speech of the lecturer was not so precise as that of her predecessor. — Double r can be employed conveniently in the final syllable of lecturer; the same applies to double s in predecessor. (25) The throng at the gate was enormous. — See how the r is clearly shown in throng, and how it is blended with m in enormous. (26) What kind of a watch do they wish to buy, — a stem-winder? — Note ndr placed high in ivinder. (27) We must find a scape-goat for this error. — See how nicely double r can be used in error. (28) She would like to have a bonnet with a broad brim or with big ostrich feathers. — See how n is shaded and how the vowel-stroke preceding t is shown in bonnet, M^here o has the "a" sound. Note also braw in broad. See how conveniently o and str are joined in ostrich. Observe thrs blended in feathers. Medium t in ostrich will be found more con- venient than long t ; though the latter would not be wrong. It should be remembered here, that the student, having decided which of two possible outlines to use, he or she should, always use the same outline for the same word. (29) The prisoner tried to snatch the weapon from the hand of the keeper. — No o is heard in prisoner. Observe n shaded in snatch. Keeper is actually written keepr. (30) Not all those who go to the gold region come back with gold. (31) The murderer tried to strangle the victim, but the approach of the men drove him away. — See how well upward v can be used in victim, and how clearly r is brought out in appi'oach and in drove. Note also how nicelj' double r, blended with d, can be used in murderer. (32) I like the frank manner of tiie man ; yet he may be a fraud.— No double n is necessary in manner. (33) I told him to get some witch-hazel for the sprain. — In witch-hazel ch and h can be joined conveniently, and s and I are blended. (34) The rope was too slack for the tight-rope walker. — See s and I blended and I shaded in slack. Also k and r blended in xvalker. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 35 (35) How can this broker trade ou such a small margin? — Note h anrl r and k and r blended in broker. No " i" sound is heard in marfjin, the word sounding like marjn. (3«i) She had taught the tot to say " Hello." (37) How often does he count this sujn over? (38) The sick man has much cause for anger, for the doctor was very rude to him.— Compare sick with the outline for so (in 4 above). (39) General Harrison was a good commander. — Note the outliue for Harrison, where no is audible. (40) Take care, my son ; the bad habit may spoil your chance to reach your end.— Note t placed high in habit. Also the initial ay stroke in end. (41) There was quite a tussle for the tassel the king had thrown among the crowd. — Compare tussle, st placed low and blended with tassel, t shaded. Note how ;• is clearly shown in thrown. (42) The widow does not like the appearance of the window.— Compare the outline of widow with that for window. (43) The cripple was a fraud.— Note kr placed high in eripi^le. Wbiting Exercise. (44) Signal to the boat to make for the shore. (45) "Who would conceive the notion to write such a letter?" (45a) "Perhaps the book-keeper or the manager," replied the office boy. (46) The days of yore have gone by, never to come back. (47) A fine young man was among the rabble. (48) He was chosen to lead them. (49) Can he leap over the stile? (49a) He said he could, but he would like to avoid that w'alk. (50) I think the maid need not trim the wick for a week. (51) This corn-stalk does not seem to be very high. (52) We saw the poor old woman weep with joy. (53) " He was always a tender son," she said, with a sob. (54) I do not feel well just now, but I hope to be all right for the wedding-day. (55) Does the child know the shape of a cone or a cylinder? (55a) She may know both. (56) I cannot decide such a grave matter so soon ; as a consequence, the man may have to wait a while. (57) A strong gale tore the main-sail off the mast ; yet we made rather good head- way. (58) We can send this bundle by mail. (59) We all must learn to obey the laws. (60) The age of dotage may make a man or a woman as weak or as helpless as a child. (61) The spinster was so fond of her lap-dog that she said she could never part from her pet. (62) We should all strive for a high aim. (63) This strong man can bend a coin with his hand. (64) 1 can draw a straight line with a good ruler. (65) "The tale was not meant for a joke," said Jake. (66) May I offer the patient a cup of cocoa? (67) How can we thank the Lord for all the good he has shown our cause? (68) How could she find the name of the writer on this card? (69) Take the bone away from the dog. (70) The officer of the guard gave orders to tear down the tent. (71) Should I order a keg of beer, or a barrel of wine? (71a) Neither should be sent here ; we can drink water. (72) The boy was caught hy the fender of the car. (73) I must sharpen my pencil ; tell him to send me a knife. (74) Who won the tug-of-war game? (75) I fear this may be a trap. (76) Do they know how to skate? (77) She has lost her purse. (78) The rider had drawn his sabre. (79) Take the trunk from the track ; I do not like such a trick. (80) Why should I toil like a slave for a lost cause? (81) A crank does no harm, so long as he does not annoy the public with speeches. (82l This may look like a game of grab for the settlers. (83) Let him chase the dog from the side- walk. (84) According to what the woman told the guard, she must have seen the ghost. (85) Tlie progress of the small boy was rather slow at first. (86) I do not want to go near the fire ; the smoke would take my breath away. (87) We have set aside a snug corner for the knick-knack. (88) The guide fell dead near the brink of the chasm. (89) What was the sense of the message? (90) I need a chisel to widen this hole. (91) According to what I heard, this report would seem somewhat queer. (92) The author sat at the desk when I came to visit him. (93) Do not scare the child ; she might shriek from fright. (94) I could read this letter just like print. (95) The woman said she struck a bargain down town at the ribbon counter, but when I said T should like to look at the pattern, she could not find the sample. (iKj) The maid cannot sweep the room with this old broom. (97) We must never swerve from the path of right. (98) The policemen came to arrest the swindler. (99) The priest prayed aloud to God to help our cause. (100) We derive no good from the precious stone ; yet we should not like to sell the keep-sake. 36 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. REVIEW QUESTIONS. 1. What are the sounds of o, and how are they shown ? 2. How do you show the vowel-sound as in law f 3. How do we write the vowel-sound as in toil f 4. What are blended letters? 5. According to what rules are they blended, and to what rules are they subject in regard to position and shading? 6. Review the logograms used thus far (using the text only, not the shorthand plates). 7. Mention the groups of blended consonants used thus far. 8. What is the difference between the sp sign and sp blended? GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 37 Lesson No. 7. As may be seen by the explanation of the blended letters shown thus far, there is practically nothing new to learn. The problem is simply, to join to best advantage- without intervening vowel-stroke — the two consonants to be blended. In Lesson No. 5, we have seen how s is blended with other letters which succeed it ; now let us look at the opposite case, where other letters precede it. iS can be blended very conveniently with a preceding consonant, but care should be taken to make the "s" a loop rather than a circle, so as to avoid any possibility of confii^^ion with th. There ai'e two important rules on this point. In aigns ending with an upstroke, such as 6, d, I, m, n, ng, and nk, the looj) is made ujiivard, on the right-hand side, as shown in the plate, and, being a loop, cannot clash with the th circle. Look carefully at the ex- amples : ribs (1) : leads (2) : ivails (3) — notice here that, owing to the nature of I, the loop remains open : a comparison between Is and Ith will show the diflTerence plainly ; skims f4) : sips (5) : sins (6) : sinks {7) : bangs (8). Compare these blended consonants carefully with the groups where th has been blended with a preceding consonant ending with an upstroke : bth (9) : dth (10) : Ith (11) : mth (12) : nth (13) : ^j^A (14). When the irreceding consonant ends with a downsfroke, the blending of .s- or th is effected on the left-hand side of tlie letter, the difference between the s loop and the th circle being observed as before. The best way to render this distinction clear is to make the s loop in the direction of the movement of the hands of a clock, and th in the opposite direction ; this rule is invariable. Compare the ex- amples of words ending in s: — legs (15) : hose (16) — note how the o is absorbed by h ; tax or tacks (17) : seats (18) : leaves (19) : laughs (20), with those ending in th : gth (21) : hth (22) : tth (23) : vth (24). You will, no doubt, be inclined to think that such groups of consonants do not occur, but a later lesson will show how convenient they are in obtaining brief outlines. Special attention should here be given to the blending of upward long t with s, as shown in (25), where s is made like a loop. Note the difference between ^jar^s (26) a.i\di parties (27). In the latter word, s is a circle and admits of a short vowel-stroke, indicating a short vowel- sound between t and s. It should be borne in mind that, when long t is followed by a short i and another consonant, it is sufficient to connect the latter immediately' with t, without making any distinction in regard to high position ; tactics (28) is a good illustration of this rule. In words like bench (29) — which sounds like bensh—sh is blended to n in the usual manner (see Lesson 5, 113). Compare bench with banish (30), where b is shaded and the vowel-stroke between n and sh is very plain, since sh is also placed high. The same principle applies to the softer sound also — as in range (31) — which is treated in the same way. Notice the absence of the vowel-sti'oke between n and g in strange (32), and its presence in drcdn- age (33) ; notice the same difference in manger (34) — where the long n is employed, and in manager (35). Pand t (36) are blended on the usual principle, viz., by ending ^j witli the t stroke ; this sign, however, assumes and retains under cdl conditions the medium size, thus producing a very brief outline, particularly when it is joined without an intervening vowel-stroke. Looking at kept (37), for instance, we cannot mistake this outline for kipt, since there is no vowel-stroke between k and pt. This would indicate the absence of any vowel, but for the important rule that, when two or more consonants are joined without an intervening vowel- stroke, and when ordinarily these consonants cannot occur without a vowel-sound between them, a short "ay" sound must be implied between them, unless there is another vowel- sound expressed (by either shading or position). This rule is self-evident and a glance at the shorthand illustration will make it plain. Kpt cannot occur alone ; it is therefore not neces- sary to write e — sounding like a short " ay"— between k and^j^ to make the word read kept. When k is shaded, the sound to be implied is, of course, "a" as in captain (38). Note the vowel-sound in script (39), expressed by the vowel-stroke and high position of skr. 452=^61 38 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. R is added to thep< combination on the same principle as in the case of medium t, that is, lengthening the stroke a little above the ceutre-top-line, which produces ^J^/", as in captor (40) ; here no " o" is audible and no o stroke is written. M and / (41) are blended by ending m with the / stroke : emphasize (42) : lymph (43j : nymph (44). It is hardly necessary to say that j?/* is replaced by/. i/and t are blended in the same manner, shown in (45), and in exempt (46), literally spelled eksemt ; in this connection,/ and t must always be traced downward. We have seen in start (Lesson 4, 194) that each t lost some of its length to obtain a brief outline ; this principle is applied whenever two ^'s occur in a word and are separated by only a few letters, as shown in attempt (47). This word could also be written with two full sized ?".s, but would have a longer outline. P may safely be omitted in the consonant-group mpt*, for words like tempt (48) are pronounced as though p were omitted. 3/ and p are blended by ending ???. with the p stroke (49) : camj^aign {50) : lump (51) — note how mp is placed low. Mpr is formed by ending mp with the r stroke, as shown in temper (52) and hamj^er (53). To m in com, p orpr is blended in the same manner : compress (54) : comprise (55) — note that in this wordpr is shortened a little to show that the " i" stroke is not intended to be placed low (which would give it the " oi" sound). Another letter which occurs very frequently in blended groups is I, and the rules in regard to blending it ai'e so simple and logical that we have in some cases employed this combination before. When I follows signs ending with a downward stroke it is wintteu close to the left of this stroke, as shown by glad (56) : ichole (57) — where o is absorbed by h : claim (58) : tackle (59) : girl (60) : little (61) : scuttle (62) : devil (63)— spelled devl : cudgel (64)— spelled cujl : cancel (65) — spelled cancl. This rule also applies to sp — as shown in splice (66), to .s7i— as shown \n flash-light (67), and to /—whether traced upward or downward. Flis preferably traced downward, as shown by flare (68) : flour (69) : when followed by t, it is advisable to trace _/? upward, observing well the difference between /e^ a.nd fl : Jtighi (70): flat (71), which compare with felt (72). Note that when/ is made upward, I is not written at the top of/, but a little below. The pen, however, must not be lifted when tracing this outline. With all other letters I is blended by writing them as closely together as possible : compare blast (73) with ballast (74), ptaee (75) with palace {76), play (77) with pail (78)— notice how pi can be written either upward or downward. Observe how closely I is connected with the adjoining letter in bald (79) and overwhelm- (80)— note that in this word over is joined to the root ivhelm : straddle (81) : ankle (82) : angle (83) — which compare with angel (84). To blend t and w simply join them without intervening vowel-stroke, as shown in twine (85) : twin (86) : twice (87). F and t, when blended, might simply be written together, as shown in (88), except that this outline would be too long for convenient use. For this reason, a shorter, but equally clear, outline has been adopted ; this is written by shading the/ stroke cd the bottom only (88o), since to shade it for its entire length would be to indicate an " a" sound. This is prac- tically equivalent to retracing the t over the/, thus making the/ doubly heavy. Notice the difference between left (89) and laugh (90) : deft (91) : draft or draught (92). This shading is easily accomplished by slightly increasing the pressure in tracing the lower part of/. jTand ence stroke are blended by ending the latter with the ^stroke, (93) as shown in spinster (94), where this group is also placed high. When we analyze the sound of the ending ("-ed") of the past participle, as in headed, aimed, sli2:>2^ed, etc., we find that it is not pronounced alike in all these words. " Ed" is dis- tinctly heard in headed, e is silent in aimed, while in slipped the final syllable has a dis- tinctly hard sound, as though the word were spelled slipt. For this reason, we write this class of words with a lending : sbpped (95)— notice how conveniently the 2^t blending is used: clipped (96): shipjied (97): stepped (98). Owing to the absence of the connec- tive vowel-stroke, the low position does not indicate an "a" sound. The syllable "ed" is plainly audible practically only when it follows a t, and is then written by blending t and d (of ed) as shown in parted (99), started (100), and acted (101). In many other eases ed is pronounced like an indistinct t, and is therefore replaced by the t stroke, which, how- ever, is not made so long as the regular t. The object of this substitution is to save time, since the t stroke can be traced more rapidly than the d. (When the d is employed, how- ever, an outline loses in brevity but is entirely correct.) Compare the sizes of t strokes GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 39 in lined (102) and lint (103), tacked (104) and tact (105). Since the t stroke is used in this connection, it can also be conveniently employed blended with the enoe stroke : danced (106) — notice the shading d : pranced (107) — the siiading of iw : winced (108) — notice the liigh position of the enced stroke. The substitution of the t stroke for d also enables us to use the medium t where it can be conveniently blended with s, but only when the latter has the soft sound. Note the difference between praiHcd (109) and pi-cssed (110) : creased (111) : teased (112) ; pleased (118). Of course it would not be wrong to use the shortened t stroke in this connection, but the outline with the medium t is briefer and more convenient. Vowels {Initially and Finally). When tlie sound of /, as in bit or beat, occurs medially, it will present no difficulties to the beginner. Now let us consider this sound initially or finally, and also as vowel-sign. While we have thus far seen only the symbolical expressions for this sound, that is, the vowel-stroke in connection with the high position of the adjoining letter, we now become acquainted with the alphabetical equivalent of i (114), which is an ordiuai'y longhand i, reduced in size and deprived of all flourishes, even of the dot. Tliis, the letter i of the shorthand alphabet, is used only when symbolic expression for its sound is inconvenient ; it stands as logogram for in, and, connected with r, for the pretix inter: intervene (115) — notice the convenient use of upward v. interdict (116) : interfere (117) : infect (118) : infest (119). We have already seen that the vowel-stroke is used initially (as in ale, for instance) — implying " ay," and that high position is employed to express the sound of i (short or long), as in bit or beat. Consequently, wlieu this sound occurs initially, the initial vowel-stroke is traced so as to reach this high position ; in other words, the initial vowel-stroke is traced up- ward from the centre-line, as shown in eel (120), which compare with ill (121) and isle (122) : image (123) — spelled imej, in accordance with the pronunciation : ink (124) — which, compared with inn (125), shows clearly the difference between nk and n. See that in imjirint (126) m,pr is shortened on account of the following t : compare impress (127) and compress (128). When i occurs finally, we employ the same principle, that is, we trace the final vowel- stroke from the centre-line upward to the top-centre-line, as shown by jne (129), which compare with may (130) and my (131) : compare lee (132) with eel (120) : glee (133). Just as the vowel-sign i is used for the word or prefix m, we can also use the initial up- ward vowel-stroke for the same purpose, so that intend (134) may be shortened to itend (134a), which is quite as intelligible. This initial stroke should, however, be shortened a little, so that it has not quite the length of a medium sign (from centre-line to top-centre-line). Note the diflEerence between intend and attend (135), where the vowel-stroke is almost horizontal. Observe the same difference between invade (136) and evade (137), inject (138) and eject (139), inquire (140) and acqtdre (141). When this initial vowel-stroke precedes d, it must be shortened so that it will strike d where the latter begins : indict (142)— pronounced indlt : indicate (143). The final sound, as in many (144), is quite different from the sound as in me, approach- ing more the i sound as expressed by the i stroke ; it is therefore expressed by a short final stroke, traced in the / direction. Care should be taken to make this stroke slanting well upward and not too large. Note the diflerence between this final y stroke (it will be referred to under that name in these lessons) in daily (145) and the final ay stroke in delay (146) ; see donkey (147) : see also decay (148) and tidy {1-19)— tidy shows plainly that the final stroke is made in the same direction as the i stroke : day (150) : note the final stroke following/ in fay (151), /ee (152), and taffy (153). After an upstroke, such as upward t, the final y stroke must be traced downward : notice the difference between doughty (154) and daughter (155) : unighty (156). By omitting the final stroke of the i sign, thus giving it the t ending, we obtain the sign for the syllables ity ; brevity (157) : celebrity (158) : rapidity (159) : aidhority (160). The vowel-sign for a (161) shows plainly how it is derived from script, being a simplified longhand a, made so small that it dwindles down to a dot. This sign cannot clash with I, since I is made by starting the dot from below, a by starting the dot from above. L never occurs alone without either the final .or the initial stroke, but a, when standing alone, is always a dot without final or initial stroke. The diflerence between I and a is therefore very obvious ; it is well illustrated by the word Allah (162)— where I is shaded and h is silent. The a dot, like the i sign, is used when the symbolic expression of the sound is incon- 40 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. veuient or impossible, and always finally for the "a" sound, as in Allah. Tliis case occurs frequently in connection with proper names ; America (163) : Ida (164) : Edna (165). When this final "a" sound is preceded by a short * sound, as in idea (166) — which com- pare with Ida (164), the logical way of expressing this sound is to place the a dot high : mania (167). This brings us to the coalescent vowel-sounds, as in menial (168), for instance. In this word we find that the "a" sound is preceded by a short i, consequently we express this sound by placing I high and shading it. This shading cannot mean an "a" sound, as in calm, since there is no such sound preceded by this short i. Note serial (169) — I placed high and shaded : idiot (170)—^ treated in the same way (o = "a"). Considering the sound in words like science (171), we find that the sound following i is also akin to the "a" sound, and therefore express it by shading the ence stroke : reliance (172) — note how in these words the ence stroke is joined to the i stroke without angle : irial (173) : theory (174)— the word sounds more like theary than theory : diary (175). To this class of sounds also belong words like ojiinion (176) — see how the second n is shaded and placed high in comparison with the first; there is no " o" audible in this word. Compare real (177) — I placed high and shaded with reel (178). To be very exact, we could also employ this rule in words like social (179), but in most cases these words are pronounced like soshl, and are therefore thus written. Note also in this word how the o is reversed and therefore joins more easily with the following sh. There is no danger that o in this connection would be read after sh, for a combination like ss/io is impossible. Note this "a" sound initially : affect (180)— which compare witli effect (181) ; see the double / used in this connection to regain the writing line : alm.ond (182). We have previously seen how Jie and who are written ; s added to each makes the words his (183) and whose (184). Logograms. 7(185) stands for in : medium t, the Log. for to, preceded by the in stroke will of course read into (186). The a dot above the line stands for and (187)— note in this logogram the absence of the initial and final stroke. Observe the preceding stroke in II (188), which stands for shall, and in the single I (189), for will. As we have seen before, the preceding vowel- stroke thus indicates that the vowel-sound of the word precedes the consonant before which it is written. (See Lesson 2, Logograms.) L followed by the final y stroke stands for only (190), when above, and for fully (191), when below the line— in consideration of the " u" sound. We have already seen that r on the line stands for ever ; the final y stroke added to it will naturally make the word every (192). The y stroke above the line represents any or body (193). It will be found in practice that these two words never clash ; anybody is con- sequently written by making the final y stroke twice in succession. Ng above the line standing for thing : anything (194) is easily W'ritten. It will be well to note in this connec- tion the other combinations of thing; nothing (195): something (196): everything (197). Kw on the line stands for question (198). Now practice the following Reading Exercise until you can read it without any hesitancy. (199) The eminent doctor informed me of the imminent danger by the poisoned wells that seemed to threaten the health of our family and of our friends.— Note the difference between eminent and imm,i7icnt, wells, and health and the ed endings in informed and seem.ed. It is unnecessary to write double I, unless it is desired to distinguish between long and sliort vowel-sounds. In this case there would be no danger of confusiug wells with whales. (200) Many a sum of money is wasted in the name of charity.— Note the difference between many and money, n in the latter word being placed low on account of the short " u" sound. Observe the shading of ch in charity, and the past-participle ending in ivasted. (201) He was such an adept in the art of speech that he could adapt to his ends such a course as no one else dared to adopt. — Observe the difference between adept — d and i)t connected without vowel-stroke, adapt— d shaded on account of the short "a" sound, and adopt— p>t shaded owing to the "a" sound of o. Note cA placed high in speech. In as, s should be shaded ; however, it is perfectly safe to write the word without shading, since ; 5- '0 Lesson 7. H -^ u -"^ f r i."^ i/v ^ ^^ l iiy * /' n /I t.^! a / — ft b w \ ^ l a u ^ v ra . ,/( sz_^_Q — iL a t 4 a — a/ v ni / " " "1"") ^ ^i" 4 " ^'' / -^"^ 'WT7, I / / / /I ^^ 7V^ / ) / ) ;^ o ^. A ^( /a — <^ /Z 7^ . h. U iJ'. 1/. ''U c / Vd '^Zy^^^^ rn^ y^ J ^ I wsr '2^ Z'L.y <^ ^ <^^ ( ^ / £"0 'SA z / to o j±£i %. s r/ /7^ javi /^x^ //" x3l..^ ^ ^^y-^ ^ ^^/ 2r^~tl^^ //:r- /yo :r * _■>* »< "^ 3L o 7^ -^ ^ Z v-^ o (C ^ . /^ . ^^c^b -' ^ zi: -^ -if ^ S^^ — /I ^ rv^ (^. Z2^ :..''x )^ ^ -i.0 J 7"^ I Y' ^p'^ e n ^ ^ ^y^ '^, ^-~^j . ' ^^ ^ jO^ z Z'.. .. ^''ci^(^L'' yJ' 'Jl^C ^ " f ^ f^ I ' ^ ^^,^ f ^ nzz. -^ '"> XoS- zr^ JI ./^^ fj , V .J // iZMUzr: ^ .. I _. o- r ^ r... .Arr rh TA, c . / 7.r zL \ ) ^ 7= ^ ^z^ /o ^^ ^ fi 00 , f^ ^ £ J') 1^ d ^H^ gyrJ ^HL. . Q- t 5 7 Q^ (_^ V^ / ^-V ^ ^ •- / J - (^ / n ^ Z^ ;!.o ^ 3^ 7^ / 7^ 1 .Ij i^ Z ^nzi^zn^ni i 'f ^. -z^ oJ t_ 1.1 ^ Ji/L \^ V r ^ 2: :^ ^ .^/, /./v/.-/.^^ : 42 GKAPHIC SHORTHAND. there is uo word like es. (We will And a rule on this i)oiut in a later lesson). Note the word else. (202) "The Islam should be spread by tire and sword," said the prophet.— Note si blended in Islam ; no shading is necessary in this word, since the a sounds like a short "e." Observe sirr in spread, and the shading of/ in prophet. (203) Hawthorne wrote many a lovely story in his "Twice Told Tales." — Note hth in Hawthorne. (204) Doctor Holmes, one of the foremost literary men of Boston, wrote the famous "One-hoss Shay."— Note the word foremost, where /, standing for logograms for for, is connected with most. See how conveniently double r is used in literary. Famous illustrates how words with the ending ous are written ; we could write the word more faithfully by placing s low, which would actually make it read fami<« ; but the sound approaches fames (e pronounced) quite closely, which justifies us in writing it as we did. See also the final ay stroke in Shay. (205) The showy horse pranced like a dancer.— Note the final y stroke in showy and compare it with Shay in the preceding sentence. (206) The naval battle of Manila took place on the first day of May, and was a great victory for our navy, though little American blood was shed.— In bloody, note bl blended and d placed low. (207) An icy wind in Valley Forge chilled Washington and his warriors to the marrow of the bones ; many a night they had to go to sleep with an empty stomach ; they had but scant shelter from the inclemency of the weather ; yet they bore every torture bravely. — Icy illustrates well how the final y stroke is made in the same direction as the i stroke. Notice how f and o, and r and j, are blended in Forge ; observe in warriors the high position and shading of r and the blending of rs ; n and s blended in bones ; si placed high in sleep ; see how conveniently the ence stroke is used in inclemency. In chilled it is not necessary to write double I, since II is employed only where otherwise a clash would be possible. (208) China is a vast empire, but she is helpless and will soon fall a prey to the naval powers, England, France, Russia, Germany, and Japan. — Note that mp in empire is short- ened a little on account of the I stroke. Note the initial i stroke in England, the shading of /;• and the ence stroke in France, the low position of /• and the high position of a in Hussia, the blending and low position of rm and the final y stroke in Germany, and the shading of J and p in Japan. (209) Australia was formerly a part of Asia. — Observe the a placed high in Australia and Asia, also the soft " sj" sound of s in the latter word. (210) "Man has the gift of speech to hide his thoughts," said the Prime Minister of Napoleon.— Note ft placed high in gift ; also the blending of the s (loop) and t in thoughts. (211) The pursuit of health, wealth, and happiness is the birthright of every man in America. — Look carefully at the word pursuit, which illustrates the important rule that r can safely be omitted in the prefix per ; perfect, for instance, would be written pfect. (212) "We emphasize that we intervene only for an oppressed nation, whose trials and misery must be stopped," said the leader of the nation to the Congress and to the people. — Note the ed ending in oppressed, and the convenient use of jit in stopped. Also observe the second p placed high in people. Writing Exercise. (213) " A bachelor's room, as a rule, does not look very tidy," remarked the spinster.— (Shade b in bachelor'' s, also blending r and s ; blend rm in rem,arked). (214) I am of the opinion that many an idiot attempts to base his ideas on the laws of science. (Place t high and shade it in idiot ; do the same with s in ideas, and with ?i in opinion). (215) Necessity is a hard task-master. (In necessity use the double s circle followed by ify). (216) The sun never sets on the dominion of the Queen of Great Britain and Empress of India. (In dominion place the second n high and shade it ; also place the final a high in India). (217) Celebrity is not always the reward of toil. (In reward start with r above the top-centre-line so that you can continue conveniently with the w ; also use the CUV curve and blend rd). (218) Small causes may lead to great results ; a single match can ignite tons of nowder. (In results place rs and I low; in match m is to be shaded). GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 43 (219) A dance is the only social pleasure I care for. (In pleasure use the soft sound of s). (220) "There is many a slip 'twixt the cup and the lip." (In slip place si, in lip place I, high ; in cup place k low ; twixt is written tw blended, then connected with knt placed high). (221) Imagine our delight when we found at the break of dayliglit the traveller nearer our home than we had dared to hope. (Bring out well the difference between delight [written d-l-i-f] and daylight, where the ay-stroke must appear clearly between d and I). (222) May the Star-spangled banner long wave over the land of the free and the home of the brave. (223) " Would society consider this act improper?" inquired the foreigner. (Society sounds like swsiety ; place the double s circle low, then make an i-stroke, and add ty to it. In improx)cr the first pr [mpr'] has to be shortened to allow space for the second pr, which must be shaded owing to the "a" sound of o). (224) Henry Stanley is a fearless traveler. (In Henry connect n with the h by means of a loop ; Hs to be shaded in Stanley ; in fearless r is placed high, so that/ is to be traced from the bottom-line to the top-centre-line). (225) " To be or not to be," is a much-quoted passage from Shakespeare. (In passage p must be shaded and therefore be traced downward ; in Shakespeare use long k after sh, and then «p, placing the final r high). (226) "There must always be two parties to a quarrel," remarked the haughty Magistrate; "I give him warning not to let such a thing happen again." fin Magistrate shade m, and use the medium sir followed by medium t for the final syllable). (227) The eel is a slippery fish, and looks more like a snake. (In slippery place si high and write slipry). (228) Every nation fights for glory, but we always fight for right. (In glory let the o be absorbed by the initial stroke of g). (229) The book of this autlioritj^ deals too much with wrong theories. {Authority is written by means of the aw curve followed by th and r shaded, followed by ity). (230) The density of the fog nearly caused an accident. (Use the ence stroke followed by ity in density, and a shortened long t in the ending of caused). (231) We all feel the loss caused by the death of our friend. (232) The traitor tried to scuttle the vessel. (In scuttle blend s and k, and t and I, the latter to be placed low. In vessel use the upward v, which may be shortened a little to join conveniently with s). Lesson 8. P. ^ r. --. f, f, &^ /o K. /f/Z-K /^-g^ iM Jts- ¥ r T} f , ^ r ^r^ 6 ) ). V'lniJl ^^ cv ^/ -^.^..^ , , /. ^ ,,(" '■ ^' '' '■ ' '■ ~ ' - ^^y^^'^ ' ^^ ^g=^^=^ ■*,"-^ ^= ^ ^= ; 90 ''"' r/ " -tii¥' r^ p - ^^^ ^ ^e r i>0^ S IS /yr Tv: • •'• c " /, "^' fi^ F=# ^^ ^ \ T-^s-x^ v^ f^ ^'^// — tf^ <--^ /9Z t^^t::^ t? 4^ ( 7-*V ^ yvL- ^:v\. ^ Co ^ ^ ■" ^^(t ^ a ^ X/O /?i_ :z --?»i F E -r^^ 7y^777Z ^i:.^ 7/^•7V.^.^^^ /-^i<) . /i // A/ n,^ .-r, ("^Tl ^ 'tt ■tf^ -4^^^ y (^yi/yi ,. / >ryy(. .1 rr /9S 42 ■^/A - t^ P ^/^ ^ ^^ -r-&- r nT^^^ ^w . s( <^ ^^"vc . .jjz ^n C /^a/ . - ^ - / ^'''•' .^rO ^ 7 ^^/ / rjj I /P- J - /^^^ ' •// ^ -x. ^W^ ZZS 6-"^-^ -^767^' TV ^-;/t j2- ? ^^ >^ /. z^^ ^J j.^:^n:^zn^i^^r^,^ri., ' J/, c -^^ . <^ (155) as in lip (156 and 156(:0, and to the second form of v (157), which must be written downward, resulting in a brief, but complete outline for the syllable /re, as in massive (158), active (159), and aggressive (160). Care should be taken to write this form of V well from the right to the left, particularly at the top, and to shade only the top of the letter, which can be very easily accomplished by slightly increasing the pressure upon the pen or pencil at the top of the letter. If it can be written by shading t at the top, ti (" te") can be logically written by shading t at the bottom (161), so that tin, for example, is written either as shown in (162) or by writing the unshaded t and placing n high. The same rule applies to eyice (163) and a few other strokes, which will be explained later. The real value of this device will become apparent as soon as it is desired to shorten the outlines for verbatim reporting. The sounds of i (as in bit) and short u often occur together, as in the final syllable of words like various (164) ; this syllable could be written literally by placing the letters us (joined) in high position, thereby expressing a short preceding I sound ; but, since in this case u would have to be written in full, the outline would not be very brief. For this reason we resort to substitution ; since various sounds almost as though spelled varias, we express this tinal sound by placing s high and shading it, as shown by (164a) : 2^''Gvious (165) — note the convenient use of the upward v. precarious (166) : salubrious (167). Logograms. U, above the line, stands for full (168), — see also fulfil (169), — and on the line, for up (170). U2^on (171), composed of up and on, can be shortened by writing n, the word-sign for on, below the line, in consideration of the initial u sound. Lmo (172) — note how conveniently these letters blend — stands for utmost. Out (173) is the a dot ijlaeed low. About (174) con- sists of the initial "ay" stroke, placed right above the out dot, so that only b is omitted. Without (175) consists of the outline for tvith, placed low and shaded, in consideration of the vowel-sound of out. D, lengthened above the centre-top-line, stands for did (176), so that in this word only the last consonant is missing. W, lengthened on the same principle, sug- gests IV and i, standing for which (177). F, sharpened (178), reading literallj- Iv ("eve"), stands for even. T, sharpened (shaded) at the bottom, stands for till (179), representing the word in full with the exception of the final U; the same letter, blended with initial u. will at once suggest until (ISO) ; and, blended with s, it is a suggestive abbreviation for still (181). The initial "a" vowel-stroke with 6, stands for above (182); with g, for again (183), to which t is added for against (184). N, above the line, is the final part of been (185), and stands for that word. The initial " ay" vowel-stroke, witli p, shaded, stands for apart (186), A long vowel-stroke, below the line, represents the long (low) vowel-sound of true (187) ; th added to this logogram, will make it truth (188). We have now arrived at a stage when we can make practical use of Shorthand, as will be shown by the business letter given in the following Readi>'g Exercise. In this exercise almost every word is written complete, in compliance with the rules laid down in these lessons. In actual practice, however, it will not be found necessary to write everything in full, and by the rules to be given in the subsequent lessons, this style of writing can still be considerably shortened. The attention of the student is called especially to the words which are discussed at the end of the transcription. Words-counected-by-hyijhens in the following paragraphs indi- cate that the Shorthand outlines are phrased. The Shorthand outlines and the annotations should be studied very carefully and miuutelj', as they embodj' and illustrate very im- portant points. (189) ^Messrs. Brown & Philips, New- York. (190) Dear Sirs:— (191) We are in receipt of-your favor of the 15th ult., and would state that the order given by-your agent will be shipped early next week by express, prepaid. (192) These GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 49 good(s) (have) been selected with particular care ; we therefore trust that the purchase may turn out as well as the other invoices which we have sent-you, and hope that-you-will favor us with further business in the near future. (193j We shall have our new samples ready next June, aud shall be pleased to put a-few dozen at-your disposal, if-you-can-use them. (194) The market has not been very active lately ; according to advices from Boston, it is overstocked there, although we are inclined to the opinion that our broker overesti- mat(ed) the consequences of last week's deal. (195) Prices have advanced slightly, but are not likely to fluctuate to any extent within the next few days, in view-of the large cargo which is retained for-you at this port. (196) At this occasion, we again wish to bring to your notice that-Europe will not be a heavy buyer just now, as we have pointed-out to-you in our former reports. (197) Our Mr. Jones will shortly leave on his annual trip and will see-you in regard to the matter about which we wrote-you a-few weeks ago. (198) If-you-have consider(ed) that the article is unknown, uncommon, and untried, we have no doubt that you will agree with us upon the terms. AxxoTATioxs to the above letter: — (189) The word 3fess/-s. is abbreviated according to the sound ; the first syllable, sounding like mesh, is briefly written by blending m and sh. See how the " u" ("yu") sound in New- York is expressed by crossing n, of New, aud Y. (190) The rule of abbreviation as in Messrs. is applied in the word ult., which stands for ultimo (meaning "last month"). See how o {of) is crossed by r, reading of-your ; this is shorter than writing of alone, and placing r below the line. It is hardly necessary to men- tion that in shipj^ed only one p> is written, and that the blended group ^>< is employed. Early, in accordance with its sound, is written as though spelled u-r-l-y. Note how nicely k, s, and t are joined in next, spelled n-e-k-s-t. Observe that e is omitted in prepaid, which is nevertheless a plain outline. Since the practical task of Shorthand is, not to report faithfully every sound heard, but such sounds as will enable the writer to obtain a faithful reproduction of the spoken words, some unimportant letters, syllables, or words, which, by the structure of the language, are necessarily implied in connection with other words, may be omitted. These are placed in parentheses ( ) in the text. For example, sentence (192) begins with the words, "These goods have been selected." The word these evidently denotes that the word good must stand in the plural, as these good would not be correct ; it is therefore unnecessary to add s to good. In a like manner, since we could not say, " These goods been selected," we must read have between goods and selected, and therefore need not write it. This princii"»le of abbrevi- ation is applied to a limited extent in the above letter, so that the student may gradually become used to it. Note in particular how k (for c) is crossed with the initial I stroke. There, written in accordance with rule (8) and joined to/, the logogram of for, will give therefor or therefore; since the two words sound alike, there is no reason why they should not be written alike. See how conveniently the ur curve is employed in 2iii''chase and turn. Observe how t of that is crossed with the initial stroke of ^ (in will), reading that-you-will. Also note the crossing of/ and chr in future. (193) Note the "ay" stroke standing for at, crossed by r, reading at-your. In disposal, see how d, lengthened above the centre-top-line, is blended with jj. Note the crossing of //with k and the latter with the connective stroke of s, reading if-you-can-use. (194) The blending of d and i' makes possible a brief, but complete, outline for advice ; in words of this kind, where no particular stress is placed upon the initial vowel a, it may be replaced by "ay"; in other words, no shading is necessary (a rule on this point will be given later). Compare the syllables overst and overest in overstocked aud overestimated, illustrating well the difference between rst without any vowel, and the same syllable with a vowel between /• and s. The prefix in, of inclined, is replaced by the initial " ee" vowel- stroke (which has been explained in Lesson 7, 134) ; the word reads practically iclined, which is just as legible. In consequences, s and ence are blended in accordance with rule (8). An apostrophe placed above A-.s in weeks would indicate the exact grammatical manner of writing it; this is unnecessary, however, the sense of the sentence indicating plainly that only one week is meant, so that s is indicative of the possessive case. (195) In advanced, note the shading in dv, in consideration of the second a; observe also how nicely the ence blended with the f stroke can be employed in this word. Fluctuate is written in accordance with rule (139). Within consists of the outline of with, joined with 4 50 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. the logogram for in, but, to save time, in is added to with, uo attempt being made to gain the writing line. Notice v and o (for of) crossed, reading view-of. Look carefully at the word cargo ; in this word the widened curve of g is employed to indicate the o, and is at the same time blended with r (sliaded), resulting in tlie syllal)les orgo, wliicli, joined to /.-, read cargo. Your special attention is called to the outlines of few (195) snxA for-you (195), wliich also compare with a-few (193). In few, f is crossed with the u sign on the line, to distinguish tlie word from a-few, where the "ay" vowel-strolie (for a) is crossed by the/ stroke ; in /or-?/o/<,/ (log. of for) is crossed by the u sign below tlie line. (196) In occasion, notice the sj sign (used for the soft sh sound of s). Observe the con- venient expressson of the " u" (" yu") sound by crossing t of that with the connective-stroke, and the latter with r of ro in Europe, reading that-Earopc. Look at the word buyer, written in accordance with Lesson 7, rule (171). See how conveniently the full sign for ow — standing for out — is blended to the d of pointed, and how medium t (for to ) crossed by the vowel-stroke (on the same principle as sent-you) reads to-you. (197) Mister is shortened like the longhand word by writing Mr. instead. It is hardly necessary to mention that in Shorthand no periods are placed after abbreviations ; otherwise the same punctuation as in longhand may be used. It is obvious that this word cannot be abbreviated in analogy with Messrs.; for the first syllable of Mister sounds like that of Mrs. and Miss. Look at the word annual, where n is shaded and starts with an initial vowel-stroke to show that the "a" sound commences tlie word; n crossed by the con- nective stroke of I and the latter shaded, represents faithfully the final sound of the word. Notice that x> in trip is sharpened by shading it at the top. See-you and wrote-you are written on tlie same principle as sent-you. (198) If, crossed by the initial stroke of h (for have) which is lengthened a little for this purpose, will read if-you-have. Note that in eonsider{ed) the syllable ed is omitted ; it must necessarily be read, since tlie word have in the sentence plainly indicates the past participle. In agree, notice the initial vowel-stroke (horizontal) for "a" and tlie final "ee" stroke from tlie line to the centre-top-line. See how conveniently tlie prefix un is written in unknown, (where k is silent and where n need be written only once, in accordance with the rules for double consonants), and uncommon; in untried, however, and in all words where un is followed by downward t, it is more conveniently disconnected. Writing Exercise. (The following words afford further exercise on the rules involved in this lesson : — ) Detest, distaste, detract, distract, distort, detect, detonate, distil, deprive, deplore, deposit, depose, dispose, depress, depart (here p should be shortened a little on account of the following t), mute, moot, music, refuse, refute, cube, cure, dupe, furious, curious, druid (bring out the r through shading), numerous, humorous, pupil, tutor (cross initial t with the connective vowel-stroke, which should be followed by medium tr), blur, slur, deter, confer (trace from the bottom-line up), flower, bower, harmonious, melodious, actual, actuate. Write the following answer to the letter in the Reading Exercise :— (Words connected by hyphens should be phrased ; j)arts of words in parenthesis need not be written ; tlie numbers after some of the words refer to the annotations.) Messrs. B. Jones & Co., St. Louis. Dear Sirs : — We have-your letter of recent date, and are glad to hear that the goods will be shipped soon, as we need them badly and await them anxiously (}). We hope, however, that-you-will not disappoint ('^) us and that the good(s) will come up to sample, so that we may have no reason for complaint against-you. We shall be pleased to see-your Mr. Jones, and assure-you (') that we are ready to arrange (*) full particulars with him. Perhaps-you- can (^) inform us at what time he expect(s) to arrive, and by what road, as our Mr. Philips would like to meet him at the station. If-you-think that prices will not go higher (^), it might be well to let the local dealers understand that-you-intend (') to dispose of our cargo at some other port. We do not think that you can make a mistake, if-you-hold on still a little longer, at least until the rumors GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 51 started by parties (®j who are interested iu the decline of the market, have been found to be true. If they are not quite true, we need make no aggressive move. Do-you-not share this opinion witli us? We have the utmost confidence (') in your ability and experience ('"), and trust that-you-will do your level (") best to make up for the heavy loss we sustaiu(ed) last year, though, we must add, through no fault of-yours. We shall not need your samples until fall, and shall write-you when to send them. Yours resp(ectfully). Brown & Philips. The following annotations will be found helpful in writing the above : — (1) Anxiously is written as though spelled ankshesly^ by starting the « A; with the initial vowel-stroke, then blending sh and adding the rest. (2) Be careful to insert the "ay" stroke between ells and point ; shorten p a little on account of the following t. (3) Cross r of assure with the short vowel-stroke to make it assure-you. (4) Do not forget to blend j and long n. (5) Cross h of perhaps with A- for can. (6) In higher, shade r — see Lesson 5, (175). (7) Cross t of that with the initial stroke of intend. (8) Use round s — see Lesson 5, (27). (9) Start on the bottom line. (10) Place the ence stroke high and shade it. (11) Blend I and v, and v and I. Write the following : — Irish (i^) Wit. The sons of Erin are known for their original wit ; there is no issue of our comic papers that does not contain a-few fruit(s) of Irish humor, of which we furnish a-few specimen (s). One day a son of the Emerald Isle was on a train bound for Niagara (") Falls. In the same car was a young man of swell appearance, who annoyed the other passengers with his braggartly words. He seemed to be very much astonish (ed), when he heard that this was the first trip which Pat had made to see the Falls, and exclaimed loudly : " I cannot see, my good man, how-you-could ('*) live so many years in this vicinity (}^), and not come to see this great, wonderful (i*) scenery. I have seen it more than a dozen time(s)." "Wonderful, is it?" replied Mr. Murphy (i'), quite disgust(ed) at the young man's ('*) conceited manners ; " what is wonderful about it?" The latter hardly knew what to answer ; such a query had never occur(red) to him. "Why, just think," he said, timidly {^^), "all that volume of water which fall(s) down the rocks. Isn't it wonderful?" "That's nothing wonderful ; that's natural (™)," was the cool answer. "Did-you ever hear of water that fall(s) up> a rock?" Everybody laugh(ed) at the young man's expense. The latter thought that if he could not impress those about him with his brains, he might do so with his money. " Perhaps-you-are i^^) right, my friend," he said ; " therefore-you-ought ('-^) to treat the crowd." " I think it is your turn to treat," retorted the Irishman. "The best way to decide this jn-oblem, I think, is this plan," proposed the young man. "I will put a piece of money in my hat, and you in yours, and we will keep on like this until-you-or (^'^) I have to give up. He who win(s) must treat the others." The plan was aceept(ed), and the young man placed a silver dollar in his hat; the Irishman put in a five cent piece ; out came the young man with another dollar ; the Irish- man put in a penny. With a victorious (^*) smile the young man brought forth another dollar ; but the Irishman said : " I am done, my young friend, the treat is on-you C**)." And the laugh was on him, too. Annotations : — (12) Place sh high. (13) Place n high, shade y, and use the final a dot. (14) Cross h (shaded below the line) with /o, which will make it how-you-could. (15) Use upward!'. (16) Write ivonder M\d place ?< close to it above the line. (17) Use m, blended with ur, which will join naturally with/. (18) Blend n and s; the apostrophe may be used, but it is not necessary. (19) Shade t at the bottom, and lengthen m above the line for the second i. (20) Natural is written as though spelled nachcrel. (21) Cross h of ]wrhaps with r shaded, which will give 2>A- (T ^. X- •» ^ ^ _^. -^^^W- -^-*^-^ ^^. ^ .^t>__ ^^ -, w Ot^/"^ ^-.,<^2^ ^^^^"^ nf- ^^ r / .i.i // Ji' _^2r. <3 v r z jgc/- 4 ^A_ ^/ _s^ .^^^--O- ^i:vd- ^^ ^)L -1 ^ t? <<^ ^->^ O ^.^ o r^/^. ^^-^^(> ^^,.^- _ii^. vv ^ / ^^^ ^^^ I3-. ^-^^ v> /^ r 4)^ -p ^^, ^ ^^o --?^ . ^^ / ^ ^-a^-:r=:,^(^i-i-_-:a^ - ^ ^^, ^?tfo ^ f. .^^.^c^^^Ay^^-^^z^. ' yA. --V^ »/^ ^ ^ ^/^>/ ..s=<::3_^ -yl '^ ._.^.^_ f^.^ /0^J ^ ^ ,z^.^ r^. '^i^//- /» /-/T^ .^ -2- -z^ ^/^ ^^ _h3._M-^_ ^7 _^__4.-^^ _.-r_C^2^^_ -t^ ^^S ^ ^/r/ /VA/^ C^ GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 53 Lesson No. 9. Lesson No. 8 is a mile-stone in the study ; for we can now write any sounds we may hear in the English language. This lesson will furnish reading and writing exercises covering the ground. We can now also dispense with the last auxiliary outline, retaining only the ordinary writing line. (1) I wonder how the rebels could get across the trocha so freely. — Note Is blended in rebels. See how clearly r is shown in troeha, which illustrates also the use of final a. (2) The delta of the Nile is in the northern i^art of Egypt.— i>e^^a illustrates nicely the difference between I and a. Note well the outline for Egypt. (3) We must gather some data on this question, which will bear on all branches of industry. — Observe the difference between delta and data. In gather, note how the con- nective vowel-stroke between g and th is eliminated and the "a" sound is shown by the shading of g. See medium str placed low in industry. In the latter word the alphabetical sign for i may be replaced by the shortened initial i stroke, as shown in Lesson 7. When carefully traced, this initial stroke is more advisable, because it is shorter ; but when care- lessly written, it may impair the legibility of the word. (4) What shall the glee club play to-night? — Note the final ee stroke in glee. (5) Will he attend the ceremony? (oa) He intends to be present. — Note well the difference of the initial stroke in attend and intends; notice also d and s blended in the latter. (6) We must sift the evidence carefully.— Observe s placed high in sift. (7) The doctors could not diagnose the case. — Note the coalescent vowel-sound in diagnose, where the i stroke is followed by g shaded. (8) Can she draw a triangle on this sheet ?— Notice the same coalescent vowel-sound in triangle. (9) The miser had soon amassed great wealth. — Compare Is, blended, in rebels (1), with Ith, blended, in wealth. (10) The army camped near the swamps, and many a man was stricken with typhoid. — Note rm, blended, in army ; also, shaded r, preceded by the initial vowel-stroke ; compare the directions of the initial and final strokes in this word. Observe mt, blended, in camped (= camt). Note nips, blended, in swamps. Observe also the convenient outline for typhoid. (11) "This is an elegant allegory," remarked the negro minstrel.— Observe go in alle- gory, and gro in negro, where the " i" sound is shown by the high position of the n. Also note the difference between el and al, in elegant &D.6. allegory. See the group str placed high in rninstrel. (12) The blow cut the aorta near the shoulder bone. — Note the combination ao in aorta. (13) Can we appeal to the higher court? — Note the coalescent vowel in higher, shown clearly by r shaded. (14) His manners plainly show his arrogance.— Observe liow o is absorbed by g in the last word of the sentence ; also compare og with go in allegory and with gro in negro (11). (15) The tax-collector thought that our villa was assessed too highly.— Note the con- venient outlines for villa and assessed. (16) He said he would assist us in our claim for redress. — Compare a.ssist with assessed (15). Redress is shortened to rdress. (17) This fine atlas does not even contain the map of the Hawaiian Islands. — Note the i stroke, followed by the shaded n, in the last syllable of Hawaiian. (18) The model for the Madonna hud really an angelic face.— Note the blending of n and j in angelic. (19) The heroic fighters lay in the trenches for two days. — Note the double vowel in heroic, where k is placed high; see also how well r is shown before o. Observe the blending 54 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. or n and sh in trenches. Two is written out in this case, t and the u {00} sign flowing nicely together. (20) The hyena is a greedy beast. — Note the i sign in hyena. See the difference between the directions of the connective vowel-stroke and the final // stroke in greedy. (21) Hygiene is a very recent science. — Note the word hygiene; here again two " i" sounds come together, the first being represented alphabetically, the second by the high position of lengthened n. (22) Diana was the Greek goddess of the hunters. — Note the shaded n following the l stroke in Diana. See also how conveniently h and n can be joined by means of the little loop. (23) What is the diameter of this sphere? — See how well medium tr can be used in diameter. (24) The courier strapped the blanket on his saddle. — Note the shading and high posi- tion of the final r in courier. (25) The moths could not stand the smell of the camphor.— Observe th and s blended in moths ; note also mjr in cartvphor. (26) The sound of the trumpet announced the arrival of the emperor. — Note mp placed low in trumpet. See double r in em,peror. (27) Everybody was amazed by the pomp of the pageant.— Compare am,azed with amassed (9). Note mp shaded for the "a" sound of in pomp. (28) The figure sliould be inverted to make the problem right. — Note how well upward V can be used in inverted, where the alphabetical / must be used initially. (29) " Defiance to all tyrants" should be the motto of all freemen.— In motto, the first o has the "a" sound. (30) The great knowledge which the professor evinced soon silenced his opponents. — This sentence offers two good illustrations of the convenience with which nee and t, blended, can be used for the past tense ; the group is placed high in evinced to show the " i" sound. (31) Glass is very brittle. — Note br placed high and tl, blended, in brittle. (32) According to republican ideas, an office-holder is an employee of the people. — Employee is another instance where the alphabetical i sign must be employed, because the final ee stroke could not be used here. See how the second p in people is shaded at the top to show the "ee" sound. (33) I should not like to see-you play truant, even though the doctor said that-you- needed some rest.— Note how well the r is shown before m in truant; the u sign must be written in this word, because the " u" sound is followed by another vowel. In rest the vowel-sti'oke may be omitted, so that rst may be blended, since this combination of conso- nants cannot occur at the beginning of a word. (34) How could-you-have-utilized the fumes of the sulphuric acid? — Ph in sulphuric is replaced by /. (35) Have-you-seen that-unique display of perfumery at the museum? — Que in unique sounds like k, and is therefore so written. Observe the final ay stroke in display. Also um placed high in museum. (36) The dude was reputed to be very profuse in his flatter.y. (37) "Not one cent for tribute, but millions for defence." — Observe n shaded and placed high in millions. Compare defence with defiance (29). (38) Austria-Hungary is called the dual monarchy.— Observe a placed high in Austria, where medium tr — blending nicely with the aw curve — can be used. (39) The King of Italy does not recognize the secular power of the Papacy. — See how well the initial shading can be applied to Italy. (40) The strenuous efforts of the friends to prevent a duel proved futile. — Note the crossing of n and s in strenuous by means of the initial stroke of s; the latter must also be shaded. (41) The ruins of the ancient castle looked hideous in the moonlight. — Note s shaded and placed high in hideoics. Observe also the combination rui in ruins, where n is placed high. (42) The bugle signal announced the capture of the mutineers. — See ncet shaded and placed low in announced. (43) Would-you-like to see the owls at the Zoo? GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 55 (44) If-you-are afraid to come-out of the house in this weather, you-should not have offer(ed) your services as uslier. — 7/", crossed by r shaded, will read if-you-are. See how well the double s circle can be used in Hcrviccs. (45) Did-you-see if the urn was genuine? — The ur sign joins readily with the n by means of a small loop. Look carefully at the outline for genuine. (46) Many a negro fears the hoodoo. — The last word offers a good illustration of the " u" sound as shown medially and finally. (47) Do-you-think he has amused the children?— See how conveniently the medium st can be used in amused^ where the initial vowel-stroke is also clearly shown. (48) Has he abused my signature? (48«) No ; for, though he is impecunious, he is honest. — When signature, as it is sometimes pronounced, has the same final sound as nature (only unaccented), the chr sign must be employed. Observe how all the vowels are shown in impecunious. (49) In their enthusiasm, the crowd nearly upset the carriage of the royal visitor. — Note s shaded and sm placed high in enthusiasm. Note also medium tr placed high in revelation to s in visitor. (50) Traces of the Druids can still be found in many a grove of oaks.— See how clearly r is shown in Druids and how the second d is placed high. (51) Perpetual peace is the dream of all good men ; yet every patriot should prepare for the eventuality of war. — As shown before, r is omitted from the prefix per. T is joined {not blended) to the second p in perpetual, thus showing the short vowel-sound between the two consonants. (52) Master Bruin is very fond of honey. — Note hru blended and n placed high in Bruin. O in honey has the short " u" sound. (53) Apart from his distrust toward me, he has shown no hostility against me. — In toward r is scarcely audible ; we are therefore justified in omitting it, showing clearly the following " a" sound by shading d. (54) I wish you a happy New-Year. — Note how the u sign in wish-you affords a better opportunity for crossing than if the short up-stroke were used. Note also the crossing of n and the initial y in new-year, showing how a brief outline can be formed when neiv is followed by another word. (55) His stupidity caused numerous mistakes. — Observe how the outline caused is short- ened by blending k and s, yet how clearly the vowel-sound of the word is shown. (56) If-you-do not spend more than-j-ou will earn, you-will be happy. — The phrase at the beginning of the sentence shows how safe (legible) such phrases are : the outline reads literally if-u-d, which can have no other meaning. When there is no opportunity for crossing the preceding consonant, the u sign must be employed, as shown by you-will. It will be seen from the rules in Lesson 8 that there are two ways of writing the initial syllable which has the sound "earn" or " urn" ; by using either the ur sign, as shown here, or by preceding r by the initial vowel-stroke placed low, as uncle or us is written. The convenience of having these two strokes will be apparent later ; in the present instance, it is evidently more convenient to use the ur sign, as the hand, before starting the word, is in the exact place where the ur sign starts. (57) You-should always fulfil a promise ; but-you-should be careful when-you give it, that-you-can carry out what-you-say. — This sentence offers very good examples of the saving obtained in outlines by the crossing principle. Writing Exercises. (58) Who is the drawee of the draft? (59) Many famous men were not graduates of colleges. (60) If you should not deem it wise to use a long fuse, you had better not try this method. (61) Cupid, as a rule, is depicted with a quiver and a bow. (62) " Have-you-ever heard such an impudent answer?" asked the professor. (62a) " Perhaps-you-never tried to answer it-yourself," was the calm reply of the student. (63) It is a very true maxim tliat " united we stand, but divided we fall" ; yet how many a nation, many a party, many a family, seems to overlook it. (64) The vial was filled with deadly poison. (65) Do-you- think that-you-raight have a better view from the tower of the church? (66) It is the intellectual power that makes man the master of the beast. (67) The opal is quite a precious jewel. (68) The nephew and the uncle could never agree about their business. (69) The 56 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. joy of the farmers about the capture of the notorious horse-thief was so great that they lighted bonfires. (70) We should all try to acquire knowledge and to diffuse it as much as we can. (71) I warned him not to fall into the hands of that usurer. (72) Have-you-uot said that-you-will help me? (72a) How do-you-know I said I will help-you? (73) Shall I show you the temple of the muse ? (74) The author displayed much acumen in the article he wrote. (75) The peculiar pecuniary condition of the duke compelled him to bow to the wishes of the petulant young lady. (76) Could-you, would-you, or should-you be on the side of the oppressed in this quarrel ? The Natioxality. A Frenchman and an American once happened to debate on the merits of their nations, and each claimed that his own people was further advanced in literature, the arts, and commerce. As may well be guessed, at the end of their battle of words, their opinions were as far apart as at the start, — that is, each insisted that his nation was the first on the face of the globe. Finally the Frenchman wished to end the dispute in a polite manner, which would not M'ound his opponent, and said, — "After all, sir, if I were not a Frenchman I should like to be an American." "And I, sir," was the proud answer of the Yankee, "if I were not an American, I should want to be an American." REVIEW QUESTIONS. 1. Show the diflference between Is and Ith blended ? 2. What is the general rule for blending consonants with s and with I? 3. When is the alphabetical sign used for a; when for i; when for u; when for owf 4. How is the u ( yu) sign shown ? how the ow sign ? 5. When is the latter connected ? 6. How is the principle that certain consonants cannot occur together without a vowel between them utilized for shortening outlines? 7. Is the vowel neglected in such cases ? 8. Mention the groups of blended consonants used so far. 9. Review the logograms used thus far, using the text without the shorthand sheets. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 57 Lesson No. lo. Just as we have logograms (word-signs) for the words most commonly met with (about one hundred in all), we also have standard contractions for some frequent Affixes, Prefixes, and Terminations, of which a few have not yet been explained in the previous lessons. Ab and ad are both represented by the a dot, which is written close to the rest of the word, but disconnected to express ab, and joined to the rest of the word to represent ad, as shown by absence (1), abscond (2)— where o is short, sounding like a in father, admit (3), and adjoin (4). These words are literally written a-sence, a-scond, a-mit, and a-Join, which abbreviations could never be mistaken for words other than those quoted. However, when b and d of the prefixes ab and ad are followed by another 6 and d (as in abbreviate or address), or by a vowel (as in aborigine or adamant), or by a consonant with which b and d blend conveniently' (as dv in advance), the a dot is not employed for the prefix, the initial ay stroke followed by b or d being more conveniently used. A trial of the words given as examples will at once render apparent the value of this rule. Be, as in behold (5), bes2oeak (6), begin (7), and betake (8), is a 6 reduced to about half its size. As the examples show, it changes position if necessary, so as to connect readily with the following letter. Sk (for c-c) stands for the prefix circum, as in circumspect (9), circumference (10), etc. ^(for e), shaded below the line and disconnected, represents the prominent sound of counter ; counteract (11)— note how a is clearly expressed in act ; countermine (12). We have already learned the sign for the prefix con (consisting of ko), as in contain, concise (13), etc. Just as o may be turned around for the sake of convenience, so the con sign is turned around in all cases where it is not followed by a small sign or an upward t or /. This rule can be applied only when ko stands for con ; in words like coat, for example, ko cannot be turned around. A glance at the examples will show the .saving in outline obtained by the above rule. Care should be taken to draw the initial stroke of k (reversed) well from the left to the right ; continue (14) : conflict (15) : condole (16) : congress (17). Contra is well expressed bj* the a dot added to con, as in contradict (18). For, or fore, is represented by the logogram of for. As some of the previous examples illustrate, — adjoin (4), bespeak (6), etc., — affixes are joined to logograms in the same manner as to other letters. This rule holds good also in the case of/, as in forgive (19), foresee (20), forestall (21), etc. In ob and sub, b is omitted ; oblige (22) : obstinate (23)* — note how nicely o and st are blended : subject (24) : submit (25) — s must be placed low in words with sub. Super can be written upward or downward ; supersede (26) — note how .s blends with r ; superfine (27). When writing upward, take good care to preserve the curve oi }>, so that it does not conflict with /. In sur, r is omitted, s being placed low ; surmise (28) : survey (29). This prefix will not clash with sub. Subter is written in the same manner. It will be found that these two prefixes never clash in practice, as the few syllables found with subter do not occur with sub. In trans, ns is omitted, leaving tr, r being shaded ; transjyose (30) : transfer (31). Under should be written by placing ndr low, but no particular attention need be paid to position ; the word therefore stands generally on the line ; undergo (32) : underrate (33) — note the omission of the second r, on the principle that double consonants are ordinarily not written. * There are a number of variations corresponding to the sound of in different words, the differences being as great as those between ode, on, and one, or as delicate as that between ore and or. For shorthand purposes,— as in longhand,— it is unnecessary to pay any attention to this difference, and initial o is nearly always expressed by the o curve. Tlie few words in which any distinction is recessary (as in ode and odd) will be discussed later. 58 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Uni is represented by the vowel-stroke crossing tlie first letter of the following syllable, thus representing the " u" ("yu") sound; uniform (34): university (35). These are written ti-form and u-versity, — note in the latter word how conveniently the upward v (placed low) is employed when used initially and followed by the short " u" sound. In ultra, Itr is omitted, so that the prefix is represented by its vowel-sounds, — viz., the a dot preceded by the short initial vowel-stroke, in accordance with the rules for the initial short " u" sound ; ultramarine (36) — note m and r blended. The termination ing of the present participle is written in two ways: following a letter ending with an upstroke, the ing sign (37) is used, being made like the u sign, with the sole difference that the latter is a medium, the former a large character. With other letters this ing stroke blends as does n; ebbing (38) : doing (39) : ailing (40): gaining (41) : bat/iing (42) : getting (43) : catching (44) : oiving (45). After letters ending with a down-stroke, the ing hook is employed, as shown in purring (46) : brewing (47) : showing (48) — note how o is absorbed by the sh curve ; sjyeaking (49) : lifting (50) : having (51) : caging (52) : backing (53) : rising (54) : living (55) : beating (56). Where the hook joins left-hand curves, such as j and h, it will necessarily form a little loop. The exception, made for the sake of brevity, is r, which is blended with the ing stroke, as shown in daring (57) and roaring (58) ; the out- lines will at once show that this method of writing ring is shorter than r and the i7ig hook. There may be some little doubt in the mind of the student as to whether the letters I, th, s, sp, sh end with a down-stroke or an upstroke. It is not difficult to decide : by virtue of their final strokes, which have an upward tendency, I and th belong to the former class ; the others — s, sh, sp — belong to the latter class, as they end where the final strokes are met hy the downward strokes. It is well to remember here that the two signs for ing are used only for the participle. The noun ring, for instance, must be written by placing r high and following it by the ng sign ; in mourning, the ing sign must be employed, while in morning, ng must be placed high. The syllables ical are expressed by simply joining I at the end of the word ; practical (59), for example, is really written practl. This cannot clash with practicable, as will be shown by that word (60). Able is indicated by joining I shaded at the end of the word ; see ipracticahle (60) : lovable (61) : amiable (62) — note I (shaced) pladed high in consideration of the preceding short " i" shound ; incontestable (63) — written icontestl. Ible is written by adding I placed high, on account of the short " i" sound ; jtossible (64) —written either with the o curve or s shaded, according to the pronunciation of o ; feasible (65) : visible (66). Soluble (67) shows how the "u" ("yu") sound of uble is written by crossing, the word becoming solule, which is perfectly intelligible. The termination tion (shen) is replaced by the short n stroke when short, and by the long n when long ; at the same time the preceding vowel-sound is indicated by position. This rule does not apply to words where the termination is preceded by only one syllable, as in nation (68) ; but it is employed in donation (69), operation (70), conciliation (71) — notice how the long n stroke placed high and shaded expresses the sound " /a" preceding tion, retaliation (72), continuation (73) — observe how the n stroke is crossed and shaded in this word, and intrusion (74) — note long n placed low. Compare the examples of the short sound ; impression (75), retrogression (76), concussion {11) — see n placed low on account of the short " u" sound, condition (78)— see n placed high for the short " i" and observe how conveniently con and d join, 2^^>">nission (79) — we have seen before that r is omitted in the prefix per, and jiosition (80). The terminations wise and tvard are both safely and suggestively represented by w added to the preceding syllable ; likewise (81) : afterward (82) : forward (83). The latter two words could hardly be read for " afterwise" or " forewise," while the first could not be read " likeward." In a similar manner, hood is represented by h added to the preceding sj'llable ; knight- hood (84) : hardihood (85) — note h placed high on account of the preceding "i." Fold is represented by/ added to the preceding syllable; blindfold (86) — see how con- veniently the blending can be employed here. Ship, as in kinship (87), is represented byp being added, or blended if convenient, as in friendship (88) and hardship (89). GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 59 Bior is written by placing double r {rr) \n high position; inferior {QQ): superior {^l): exterior (92) — see how the initial vowel of this word is clearly indicated. The termination meiit is represented by m, slightly diminished in size ; atonement (93) : statement (94). When following the encc stroke, m can be blended with the former by end- ing ence with the in wave, as shown in commencement (95) — literally written commencem, advancement (96), and announcement (97)— note encem placed low and shaded. The termi- nation mental will be derived logically from the above by adding I to the m of ment^ as in instrumental (98j and sentimental (99). Omissions. We have seen that certain letters can be omitted without sacrificing legibility. One of these is medial i/, in words like mayor (100), layer (101), and slayer (102), the sound being represented by a lengthened connective vowel-stroke, thus actually writing ma-er, la-er, and sla-er. This principle of omission can also be extended with impunity to certain syllables, thus producing very brief outlines for long words. While this may at first seem somewhat puzzling to the novice, it must be remembered that the ultimate purpose of shorthand is, not to write letter for letter what one hears, but to take such record of the sounds that the words can afterwards be accurately reproduced. Therefore, if the principle of omission is applied according to the rules, there will be no guess-work in reading stenographic notes. Tand tr may be omitted before final y ; liberty (103)— < omitted in this word enables us to blend b and r, resulting in a very brief outline ; plenty (104) : country (105). Before ive and if, t can be omitted ; x>luintive (106), which compare with j^iciintiff (107) : attentive (108). Preceding the ence stroke, t can always be omitted; assistance (109): sentence (110): distance (111). JEnce may be omitted before a final y ; agency (112) : fluency (113)— you will note here that u, being followed by another vowel-sound, must be written: persistency (114) — look carefully at this word ; besides the ence, the preceding t and r in the prefix are also omitted, yet the outline cannot be read for anything but x>ersistency , reading actually ^jesi-ss^. The medial syllables it and if may be omitted, shortening substitute to sustute (115) — see how .s of sub, though near the top-line, is low in relation to the following letter, and so is practically low, implj'ing the short " u" sound, constitute to constute (116), institution to insfution (117) — note in the last word the crossing of long n for the " ution" (yushn) sound. As examples of the omission of if, look at modify (118), notify (119), and verify (120). Medial h is likewise omitted ; for example, comprend is written for comprehend (121). When self occurs in connection with other pronouns, it is replaced l\y / blended, as in myself (122), himself (123), herself (124), yourself (125), ouiselves (126), and themselves (127). Cardinal, Numbers, except round numbers, are written as in longhand, but as devoid of flourishes as possible ; they should be made a little larger than medium-sized letters. The following speed devices can be used advantageously for round numbers : — 100 is expressed hy a small cipher placed high ; 200 (128) : 1000 is represented by a small stroke above the line, like an apostrophe ; 3000 (129). This apostrophe can be blended to the cipher, so that (130) reads 40,000, (131) reads 500,000, and (132) reads 6,000,000, being 6 " thousand thousand" ; also, (133) will read 70,000,000, and (134), 800,000,000. The months of the year may be abbreviated in the same manner as in longhand, writing Jan. for January, Feb. for February, etc. In Sept. the vowel-sound may be omitted, blending s and pt, as will be shown in the Reading Exercise. Logograms. The prefix be, joined to the first letter of the following syllable, forms a very suggestive word-sign for words like beside{s) (135) — actually written bcs, behind (135o)> before (135/>), between (135e), beyond (135d), and because (135r) — note how conveniently the vowel-sound can be expressed in this word. I, standing for in, joined to the last letter of stead, represents instead (136) ; since, in practice, this word is always followed by the preposition of, it is unnecessary to write the latter, so that (136) should be read instead of. 60 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Note the word-sign for satisfy (137), where only / and the first two vowels are omitted. Satisfaction (137a) will logically be formed by replacing i (for ''y") in satisfy with n, and satisfactory (1376) by substituting the final y stroke for n. Circumstance (138) is expressed by adding st to the prefix, actually MTitiug circumst. Notwithstanding (139) is represented by t (for not) and w (for ivith). Mention (140) is expressed by sh (above the line), its foremost sound, the word sounding like menshn. R above the line is tiie logogram for ivere (141). Long n placed high represents the final sound of mean (142), and on the line, of remain (143). In yesterday (144), the initial sound of yest and the final sound of day form a convenient outline. The final sound ring (146) is the word-sign for during. Extra (146) is written by omitting tr ; extraorditiary consists of exo (147). (148) shows the word-sign for setf when standing alone. Almost (149) consists of st — of most — joined to the logogram for all. Derivatives from Logograms. We have seen before that logograms are used, just like other letters, in combination with prefixes, terminations, etc. The general rule in this regard is, to join the affix with the logogram, provided this can be done conveniently ; otherwise, the affix is written above the line, as closely as possible (but disconnected) to the logogram, unless the indication of a " u" sound might require low position. The following words will illustrate the affixes attached to logograms : — If J placed low reads Ji/st, ad and er added at the beginning and end will read adjuster {150) : Justiflab/e (151) — note how the " i" sound is preserved bj' tracing the i stroke up to the centre-top-line, as otherwise an "oi" sound-might be inferred : iinjust (152) : justice (153) : upper (154) : meaning (155) — where the ng sign attached shows that this is the noun : remaining (156) — compare this ending with the preceding one : onward (157) : cir- cumstantial (158) : truly (159) : in untruth (160), however, the prefix is more conveniently detached. In greatly (161), the I of ly can be blended with gr, while in greater (162) and greatest (163), the terminations are disconnected. To the logogram for extraordinary^ ly can nicely be added (164). Ft, blended, stands for the word fit ; consequently, preceded by the out dot, it will stand for outfit (165) ; joined to the prefix he and the ending ing, it will read befitting (166). In accordingly (167), ly is detached. In practice it will be an easy matter to decide whether an affix must be connected or disconnected. In the preceding lesson we have resorted to Phrasing in order to express the "u" sound; but phrasing, when judiciously used, can be employed to a larger extent, and will then be greatly conducive to speed. It is necessary to emphasize the words when judiciously used; there is a strong tendency among beginners to believe tliat the more words they phrase together into one outline, the higher the speed they obtain. This erroneous and dangerous idea is caused to a large extent by authors of text-books who, in order to exhibit the "superiority" of their systems, use long and intricate phrasings for words that seldom occur together, at times writing a whole sentence in one phrased outline, which, by its very phrasing, becomes too awkward for speedy writing. Upon closer exami- nation, moreover, it is often found that the same sentence could be written more rapidly, if only a few words — or perhaps none at all — were phrased. By experienced writers, phrasing is done by instinct rather than by rules ; and no phrasing is used, unless it comes naturally to mind. In taking notes, it is better not to phrase, if time is lost in the effort of joining words ; and especially is it better to phrase too little rather than too much. In practicing, however, exercises on phrasing form a most important part of the study ; in fact, in writing words which frequentlj- occur together, the student should always carefully consider whether or not he can phrase to advantage, as it is only by constant l^ractice that phrasing becomes a natural factor in the acquisition of speed. By keeping in mind the few rules laid down in the subsequent paragraphs, and by following closely the examples given in the shorthand plates, the student will soon acquire that "instinct" which will tell him when to phrase. The two "Don'ts" following should be well remembered : — Don't phrase words that do not join convenientlj'. Don't phrase words that, according to their sense, do not belong together ; this includes words separated by a punctuation mark. For example, the words for you can be con- GRAPHIC SHOIITHAND. 61 veniently phrased ; but they should not be phrased when they occur, for instance, in a sentence like "Whom did they send for, you?" The following General Rules about Phrasing will be all that it is necessary to say on the subject from a theoretical point of view. Little words that frequently occur together, such as the articles and prepositions, for instance, should be phrased ; since the ay stroke stands for both at^ a or «?i, two aij strokes joined will read at-a or af-aa (168) ; see also of-a (169), in-a (170), and to-a (171)— note how the ay stroke is brought out clearly in all these groups. When they are phrased, logograms may leave their places (above, on, or below the line) : an example of this rule is found in fo-any (172), w'here the final y stroke— for any— in brought down from the centre-top-line and joined to ^— for io ; compare this outline with io-a : for-any (173). To-this {174:)— this brought down from above the line ; to-these (175) : of-this (176) : of-fhese (177) — note how well the difference between this and these is observed hi these words by the use of the short or long connective stroke respectively. As-to (178) can be written like (178«)t where s, preceded by the initial ay stroke, is blended to medium t; as-to-this (179). But-the (180), to-the (181), and have-the (182) show how conveniently the article the can be blended with these little words. Look carefully at the words end-of-the (183) ; see how nicely o (for of) fits into the final d curve, and at its end turns naturally into the th (for the) circle. Phrases which occur frequently in the same form should be joined ; for example, of- course-not (184), in-due-course (185), not-at-all (186). The personal jironouns and the auxiliary verbs also come under this head ; I-cannot (187) : I-have-not (188) : I-{have)-been (189) — where have is omitted, because it must be im- plied, as the phrase could not read J6ee/i.- I-had ^190): I-am-not (191) and (191a)— see m and t blended. In i^-not (192) t (for not) is joined to in: it-is (193). We have already seen that the shortening power of phrasing can be intensified by the use of blending, when the last letter of the preceding word admits of blending w'ith the first letter of the following word. This is well illustrated by stand-for (194), where d and / (for) are blended, and by that-she (195), where the tch sign (as in catch) is employed, the outline reading literally thafsh {sh being log. for she). Note with particular attention the difference between ivith-the (196), ivith-a (197), and tvith-any (198). Also note and-the (199), consisting of th (for the) in the and position ; ajter- the (200), where the two straight strokes are joined by means of a th circle instead of by the angle ; and in-the (201), where in is (as usually) replaced by the initial ee stroke. If you find difficulty in reading a phrased outline, the best plan is, to resolve it into its components and read each letter singly ; for example, in the phrase I-am-not (191), the meaning will readily suggest itself, if you read /, ?», t sei^arately. Practice will soon put you at ease in regard to phrasing ; and the phrased groups should therefore be carefully studied Avith the aid of the annotations in the following Reading Exercise. (202) Dear Friend :— (203) I-am in possession of-your-letter of-j-esterday, notifying me that-the-steamer " Universe" has-not-yet unload(ed) her freight, and that-she cannot-be ready in-a week or-so. (204) I-regret-the situation ; but, owing to-the absence of-my partner, I-am-not-in-a jiosition to give-you much assistance, although I do-not-like to-see the ship detain (ed) after-the first of Sept., through the fauit-of-the agency. (205) I-see no way in-which-I-can-help-you out of-this trouble without transgress(ing) my instructions. (206) I-have-not-yet-seen-the owner of-the schooner, as he-has left for-the interior with-the mayor ; but I-shall send-for-the manifest and see what-I-can-do for-you in-the-matter. (207) I-shall also ask the Commis- sioner whether-j'ou-are eompel(led) to submit to-this treatment, or whether it-is-not tlie duty of-the adjuster to ofier all-the assistance he can, instead (of) putting such obstinate resistance in-your way, (208) As-to-the other complaint of-which-you write, I do-not blame-you. (209) I-have- never heard-of such conspicuous ill-will as that which-the constable now exhibit(s) toward- you ; but I-have-no doubt that he will-m)t-l)e entirely incontrolhible, and that-you-can eventually settle with-him upon your own terms. (210) After-all, I-am-not-at-all pleased 62 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. with-the admission lie makes ; but, though I disapprove of-it, I regret tliat I-eannot dispi'ove it. (211) Our new-contract, whicli-we conclud(ed) yesterday with-the West India Trading Co., cal(ls) for transportiou of 500,000 bag(s) (of) rice, bound-for Cuba. (212) Your-since(rely), Henry Miles. Annotations. — As said before, these phrased outlines will be found very easy to under- stand when they are resolved into their component parts. Looking at the phrase has-not-yet in (203), we find there h (for have or has), t (for not), and y (for yet) ; all these are familiar to the student, the only new feature being that the three logograms are joined into one outline. Also note that the-steamer, that-she, and cannot-be. Observe the blending of r and s in or-so. (204) Note I-7'egret-the. See long n shaded and crossing the preceding t in situation. Observe the phrasing of-iny, and the group I-am-not-in-a, where each word is brought out clearly, although the outline is very brief. Observe d and t joined in do-not-like ; this out- line could not be mistaken for debt, which word would have no sense if applied in this sentence. To-see should be carefully studied ; note how conveniently the s of see is formed by joining medium t (for to), by means of a loop, with the final ee stroke. In to-say, t will be joined in a similar manner with the ay stroke ; in to-sigh, with the / stroke. Notice the outline for Sept., where the vowel is omitted and s and 2)t are blended, in accordance with rule (37), Lesson 7. See how well of and the, phrased, can be added to fault. (205) Observe how conveniently s can be joined to the i stroke in I-see, and how clearly the final ee stroke is brought out. In the group in-tchich-I-can-help-you, the preposition in is replaced by the (short) i {ee) stroke, and the u sign blends naturally with the preceding p, which is crossed by the short up-stroke for you. When without is followed by a verb, the latter must always be in the form of a present participle ; therefore, any one who reads "without transgress my instructions" will know at once that this must be " without trans- gressin^r," and the syllable ing may be omitted with safety. (206) The group I-have-not-yet-seen-the, though very concise, is very plain ; note how the s of seen is formed by joining n by means of a loojx Observe the blending of d and / in send-for-the, where also the th circle is conveniently added to / {for). In 7nanifest, the medial syllable if is omitted. Your attention is also called to the group what-I-can-do, where the i stroke forms a natural connective line between what and can. (207) Note the shading of s in ask, preceded by the initial vowel-stroke. Your attention is called to the phrase it-is-nof, which reads literally its not ; but as this group would have no meaning, it is safely employed for it-is-not. If it were desired to write ifs not, the same outline would be used, and an apostrophe inserted between the two fs. The second t must of course slant a little more than the first ; otherwise the s loop could not be formed, and the second t could not be distinguished from the first. Observe the word conmiissioner, written by adding r to the outline for commission. Note the difference between assistance (with the initial ay stroke) and resistance (commencing with r). Look at the group in-your, where it is more convenient to jilace r below the line than to resort to crossing. (208) As-to-the forms a very convenient outline, as do also of-which-you and bkone-you. (209) See how easily n is joined to h (for have) in I-have-never ; as usual, in this case n and h are joined by means of a small loop. Look at the outline for heard-of, where — in analogy with the case of end-of-the — the o {of) curve is blended with the final d. Con- spicuous illustrates well the saving in outline by reversing the con sign ; note also the vowel group in the final syllable of this word. Tlie logogram for tuill is used for the noun as well as for the verb. Notice how s is formed in constable, by joining con (reversed) to t by means of a small loop. In exhibit, s must be implied, and is therefore omitted, while medial h is omitted in accordance with the rule. Note the outline toward-you, actually written tow-ad- you. In, of incontrollable, is replaced by the initial ee stroke. Note the crossing of t {that) and k, reading that-you-can. (210) Observe how the r of after is blended with the atv curve of all, reading after-all. The grou[) I-am-not-at-all is very clear, yet concise. Notice the difference between disap- prove, with the ay stroke between dis and x>>'Ove, and disprove, where dis and pr are blended. Observe also the phrase of-it, where of leaves its regular position. (211) See how n crossed by co of contract reads new-contract. Note the a dot placed high in India, on account of the preceding short " i" sound. See how conveniently d of Lesson lo 1_ yO y^^i.^^//. .^O.^j -^ {0 -f r 2jl y^-^/^y.-y.A/^ Sl-ZO -7^ g^ 1^/J^,/^W (/. rw X ^/> drprif r\ ^r\. ( r".. SP//?.^ /j, -i-^ ' V a^ ?^. 64 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. bound and / {for) blend in the group bound-for. Cuba eould also be written by leaving k on the line and crossing it with the connective voivel-sti'oke followed by 6/ this stroke, how- ever, should be omitted wherever possible to gain brevity, which is done in this instance in a very convenient manner. (212) Since, written at the end of a letter will hardly be read for anything but sincerely. If such abbreviations are used in longhand, they are even more permissible in shorthand. Yours and since are blended ; note how the ence stroke is placed high on account of the Bhort "i." Do not fail to send in for correction the following Writing Exercises. (A) Abject, absent, abrupt, abhor, abridge, abode, absolute (o, being scarcely audible, naay be omitted), adhere, adjoin, admonish, admire, admiration, beseech, beset, betray, besti'ide, bestud, befall, betroth, bewitch, circumscribe, countermand, countermarch, coun- termark, countersign, counterfeit, countercheck, conscience, consent, constant, congenial, confirm (start on the bottom-line), condemn, conserve, consign, contempt (start at the top- line with reversed con), continent, forbear, forbid, foreground, foregone (let the initial g curve absorb o), forefather (trace first / downward), foreclose, forethought, forfeit (consisting of logograms for /or and fit), object, obliterate (write oblitrate, using medium tr), observe, obstruct, obtuse, obvious (use upward v), subside, submit, subdue, surface, surname, transact, transfigure (write tra figr, separating the two syllables), transfix, transform, translate, underbid, underline, undermine, underscore, undertake (used upward t), unicorn, bleeding, gleaming, gloaming (let g absorb o), tacking, ticking, stunning, shunning, running, bang- ing, fading, leading, bidding, seething, wreathing, ailing, failing, going, waving, thriving, striving, beating, feasting, hoeing, sifting, aping, catching, gushing, rushing, perforation, restoration, consternation (start at the top-line with reversed con), obligation, reputation, oscillation, confusion, contusion, conclusion, transgression, admonition, ammunition (start with initial vowel-stroke and shade m), contrition, perdition, completion, adhesion, appro- priation, otherwise, heavenward, concealment, ailment, emolument, treatment, employ- ment, boyhood, falsehood, perspective (omit r), gentry, shanty, scanty, paltry, consistency, presidency. Annotations. — In writing long words — such as cq^propriation— the beginner may become bewildered by the multitude of sounds that strike the ear. This difficulty can easilj^ be overcome by dividing such a word into sj-llables. The above word would then strike the ear in the form, ap-pro-p^-i-a-tion, which will give the student time to grasp the sounds. A still better method is to divide the word into "stenographic" or "outline" syllables, — that is, so dividing it that each group of letters will be written with one stroke of the pen ; c(ppropricdio7i would then look like this : a {ay stroke)-pro (shortened pro =^j, r, and o blended)-JaYio« (long n placed high and shaded). (£) Mr. Allan White, Memphis (spell Memfis), la. My-dear-Sir : — I-am in-receipt' of-your-kind invitation^ to deliver the open(ing) oration at-the dedication of-your new hospital and asylum f but-I-regret to-say that just-now I-cannot-tell- you* whether I-shall-be able to avail myself of-this chance to visit* your thriving county.^ However, allow-me to offer my-congratulations to-yourself and-the merchants of-your county, for-the lively interest which-you-(have)-shown in-the furtherance and development of-so-humane an enterprise. The new institution, which owes its existence in-a large measure to-your activity, is-a credit to-your county and to-the association' vvhich-you repre- sent f and show(s)-the laudable intention of-the Trades League to shelter our unfortunate fellow-creatures from-the hardships of adversity.* I-shall-let-you-know in-a-few weeks if I-can attend-the celebration ; and hope to be able to give-you an affirmative'" answer." With best wishes for-the welfare of-your association and your institution, I remain Yours-since(rely), (Here sign your own name in shorthand). GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 65 Annotations. — ' Replace in by the initial ee stroke, joining it with r (of receipt). ^ Use upward v in invitation. ^ Asylum sounds as though spelled asylem. * In tell-you blend I and M. * Use upward v. * According to the rules of this lesson, t in county may be omitted, so that the outline looks like the one for country, except that in county k (placed low) is shaded. 'In association start with the initial vowel-stroke, then use the ses circle, and follow with long n placed high and shaded. * Use r and add the logogram for present. '•Blend dv in adversity, then add rs blended, followed by ity. '"Use double// omit t, writing affirmivc. ^^ Answer will be just as plain if the last syllable is missing; use the ence stroke. (C) For a further exercise, we recommend "The Star Spangled Banner," the text for which it is hardly necessary to give here. At this point we must again warn you that speed at this stage should not be attempted ; all your efforts should be directed toward producing a neat, correct (and therefore readily legible) outline. You will thus gradually absorb the rules, and the hand will finally trace the outlines without hesitation or mental effort, just as naturally as though you were writing longhand. Before that stage is reached, do not write rapidly at the expense of the qualities of correctness and neatness ; the proper time for speed practice will be mentioned in a later lesson. It is also of the utmost importance that you read all you write. It is very easy to put strokes on paper, but the actual test of your proficiency is your ability to read your notes fluently. Should you come across an outline that does not seena legible to you, look at it carefully for a minute or two : if it does not then become clear to you, read on ; the rest of the sentence will probably give you a clue to the doubtful outline. 66 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Lesson No. ii. Up to the previous lesson, Graphic Shorthand is presented in a form in whicli it may be used in the place of longhand, almost everything being written in full. This must be thoroughly understood before the shortening devices can be considered. Therefore, unless you have thoroughly mastered Lessons 1 to 10, do not begin with this Lesson ; the more you progress in the course, the more thorough must be your knowledge of the previous Lessons. The present chapter contains comparatively little new material, treating chiefly of such shortening devices as would probably suggest themselves to you in practice. In other words, it gives you the benefit of experience in the use of speed expedients. The shortest outline is not necessarily the best outline for shorthand purposes, unless it can be traced conveniently, and therefore swiftly. This principle must never be lost sight of. We have seen in the previous lesson that brevity of outline is obtained in three ways : — (1) By the use of logograms ; (2) By shortening words ; and (3) By phrasing. Little need be said about the logograms ; being very short, they cannot be contracted any further, but they can be used to the fullest extent in phrasing. The shortening of words presupposes in the student a familiarity' with the English language*; having this familiarity, he is not forced to depend upon a perfectly complete record of the sound of the word. Ou the contrary, he is justified in omitting such parts of the word as will gain him an advantage in speed without sacrificing legibility' in outline. It is the purpose of this lesson and those following to give rules and examples for these contractions. There are a few words where ng is followed by a sound akin to w ; this may be safely omitted, writing, for example, langage for language (1), angish for anguish (2), lingisf for linguist (3), etc. In a similar manner, medial w can be omitted when it follows k (form- ing the "qu" sound) ; sequel (4) and frequent (5), — note how the preceding long sound is shown in these words by the long k : loquacious (6). The medial syllable ti may be omitted, producing very convenient outlines for words like multiply (7), rectify (8), — where, in accordance with the rules given in Lesson 10, / may also be omitted. T may be omitted also in final syllables where ti has the long sound, as in advertise (9), dramatize (10), etc. : also, in the final syllable tic ; dramatic (11 U We now consider the endings of the words. There are some words of two syllables where the final sounds, er, or, es, en, on, etc., are unaccented, and so may be safely dropped ; captain (12) — captor is as easily written in full : reason (13) : business (14) : favor (15) : fervor (16) : written (17). In thus shortening words, care must be taken that the outline so formed can be con- fused with no word other than that for which it is intended, and that a real saving in outline is achieved : this is a fundamental rule which ai)plies to all contractions and phras- ing, and must always be observed. In saying that " the outline is not to be confused with any other word," we do not mean that it may have no meaning bj' itself; it simply must not fit into the sense of the sentence : for example, in the sentence, "He is a better man than his brother," the syllable er in better can be safely omitted, as bet (the remaining outline) cannot be taken in this connection for anything but better. From the foregoing, it follows that this rule applies in all cases where the comparative or superlative is clearly indicated by the context (words like than, by far, etc.). In the ending ary, a and r are dropped, and we write commissy for commissary (18) ; see also missionary (19), — note in this word the convenient blending of sh and the preceding m (extended above the line to indicate the "i" sound) : dictionary (20). When a word has two or more terminations, only the last need be written : thus, we find * If he have uot this knowledge, he would better not resort to any contractions other than those given in the preceding lessons. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 67 exceedingly to be composed of three parts, — exeeed-ing-li/,— and accordingly drop out the ing, writing exceedly (21). This is a very important rule (applying also to some few words — like ladyship (see below) — which are similar in form, but not in etymological construction), and the examples will illustrate that it is safe; necessurily (22) : endlessly (23) : admittedly (24) : mightily (25) : ladyship (26)— in this, besides the omission of y, d is blended with ^j (for ship) : forwardness (27) — icard omitted : indispensably (28) : cleanliness (29) — where only one n is written, in accordance with the rule for double consonants : godliness (30) : selfish- ness (31) : faithlessness (32)— compare the latter with faithfulness (33), where, by placing the syllable ness low (in the " oo" i^osition), the vowel-sound of full is indicated. Note likewise pitilessness (34) and 2^'difulness (35) ; strictly speaking, these words should be written by placing medium t high, but, as our prime consideration is speed, we may employ the ity sign, as it is just as legible. The latter (the ity sign) frequently occurs in such groups as ability and ibilify, at the ends of words, where, in accordance with the above rule (since abil and ibil signify able), only ity is retained ; responsibility (36) : legibility (37) : adiisabilify (38) : 23robabilify (39): liabilities (40)— notice the final s : cajjability (41) — which compare with capacity (42): simplicity (43): activity (44)— where t and v are omitted. All the foregoing outlines clearly establish the identity of the words, but there are a few words where a clash might be possible: for instance, lovably (45), lovely (46), and lovingly (47). Although in most cases the context will indicate which word was meant, it is best to write in full the endings of such words. Look at the words thoughtlessness (48) and thoughtfulness (49) ; these illustrate another self-evident rule : when a letter which ends considerablj' above the line is followed by another letter or group which should stand below the line, it would obviously be too inconvenient to drop the hand from the top- or centre-top- to the centre-line; low position in such cases can be conveniently indicated by starting the letter or syllable to be placed low, close to, and below, the ending of the preceding letter. In words where s has the soft sound (as in measure), the sj sign may be replaced by sh. This will enable us to blend m and sh, as in measure (50), or to use the tion ending, as in decision (51) and adhesion (52). In words like vision (53), where no saving of outline is effected, it is not advisable to make any substitution. This substitution of related sounds can be applied with great advantage to the vowels: the "a" sound (as in fact) may be replaced by the ordinary "ay" sound, writing /ec^ for fact (54), fest for fast (55), pessage for passage (56) ; see also fantastic (57) — actually written fentesic. A glance at the shorthand figures will at once show the saving in out- line ; for, if the preceding / and j) in these words were to be shaded, these letters would need to be traced downward, and would therefore require a longer outline. In words where no particular advantage is gained by this substitution, shading might as well be employed : in stand (write the word), for example, where st is traced downward, it is just as convenient to shade it. In a similar manner, the " u" (" yu") sound can be replaced by the "oo" sound, provided always — and this provision holds good for all shortening principles — that no ambiguity arises : thus, instead of duty (58), we can write dooty ; instead of dispide (59), dispoot ; but we should not apply this rule to beeiuty, which would then become booty. This principle is especially valuable when the " u" ("yu") sound occurs at the beginning of a sentence, where it is not possible to cross the preceding letter ; xisage (60) — actually written oosage, the "oo" sound being represented bj- the long initial vowel-stroke placed low; see also union (61), and Europe (62)— written oorope. Look carefully at the word vsurpcdion (63) ; here the initial "yu" is replaced hy the "oo", and the medial " ur" sound is replaced by "er" ; from this it follows that the medial short "u" sound may therefore be replaced by the ordinary short "ay" sound (as in bet), so that depidy (64) is shortened to depety, education (65) to edeeation, etc. This rule applies to the syllable "ur", as well as to the short "u" sound proper, and the " ur" is not indicated by low position in words like germ (66) — note how j and rm are joined without connective stroke, clerk (67), and dividge (68) — actually written divelge, which is just as plain. In a similar manner, u is not written in the final syllable tude, as in magnitudr (69), where d joins nicely with t. Look at the word regular (70), actually written regler ; here the short u is again replaced by the "e" (short "ay"), which, having a short sound and being unessential to the word, may be omitted, just as it is often suppressed in rapid speaking. It may be laid down here as a general principle, that the safest plan in following these contractions is, to be guided by the voice. For example, it would be unnatural, if not almost impossible, to say depty 68 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. and therefore we write depety ; on the other hand, it is quite natural to say petikler for particular (71), and therefore " u" can be replaced by ay, and the r can be omitted, joining p and t in the upward sweep (thus expressing the short "ay" between them), and saving considerable time. However, when r is clearly accented, as in partner (where it is shaded), it cannot be eliminated. The word jxtrtieular shows also another rule : when an unaccented letter which may be omitted carries (by shading or position) an unaccented vowel-sound, the vowel-sound is eliminated with the letter. For example, if brilliancy (72), leniency (73), and resiliency (74) were to be written in full, the enee stroke should be placed high and shaded ; this ence stroke, however, may be omitted without impairing the legibility of the word. Look also at the word participate (75) ; here r is omitted in analogy to particular, and no special attention is paid to the short i preceding tlie second p ; note how the latter is con- nected with s near the top-line ; thus the word is written almost in full at reporting speed. Again, in large (76), r is scarcely heard, and so can be omitted, but the "a" sound is very pronounced, and must be written by shading^' (for g), so that the word sounds like laage. The same rule applies to words like partial ^ p>aashl {77), park (78), and sjoark (79) — where k must be lengthened, in consideration of the long sound. When r follows a true long o sound, it may also be omitted ; sjjort (80) : formation (81) : opjiortunity (82) : fortitude (83)— in the latter word the medial syllable ti is also omitted. In words like absolute (84), and resolution (85), o is often slighted by the voice, and may therefore be replaced simply by the connective vowel-stroke, expressing short ''ay". This rule has been employed before, in writing words like iron, lemon, etc. From the preceding, we see that an unaccented vowel need not receive the same careful attention that is given to the accented main vowel of the word : oprate cannot be taken for anything but operate (86), opra must read opera (87), nachrel is natural (88), opration is operation (89) — which compare with oppression (90). In reparation, however, p and r cannot be blended, as this outline would read representation ^ r-]jr({or 2>rescnt)-ation. The omission of vowels is not restricted to short e alone : captal is perfectly plain for capital or cdpitol (91), both of which sound alike ; aptite for aiypetite (82), 2^rincipl for principle (93) — where we see how ence and p are blended. There are a few more blendings, of rarer occurrence, but very useful as speed devices. Upward v and t can be blended nicely by starting t with v (94), as in veterinary (95), where ar of the ending is omitted ; see also the blending in vitujieration (96), where vt is crossed by jt), thus clearly expressing the "yu" sound. See how ch and /are blended in the phrase catch-fire (97) ; the real importance of this group will become more apparent in the reporting style. Look carefully at the blending of w and r (98), which reads wer, and is not a frequent combination ; it is formed on the same principle as there, and is used for the word ivhere. Standing above the line, where r represents were, it reads we-tvere (99), and on the line, with r shaded (for arc), it reads we-are (100). Tliis sign cannot clash with jar shortened, as the latter must never he used alone, and as ivr is used only in the combinations shown here. Another convenient expedient is the blending of m and b, which is expressed by the loop ; this should be carefully practiced. Mb (101), alone, stands for the phrase may-be. This loop can be used to advantage in words like nimble (102), lumber (103) — see how it blends with r. Above the line, wbr stands as the word-sign for member (104), and r blended initially with this outline will read remember (105). We now present the last group of Logograms, Member (104), as mentioned before, is rejjresented by tnbr above the line. S blended with wr, will read someivhere (lOG), in analogy to somewhat. The initial and final letters of luorld (107) stand as its word-sign. Manufacture (108) is represented by its three most prom- inent letters ; it is unnecessary to shade the /, as the principle of substitution may be applied. Manufacturer will be written by adding r to k (of manufacture). Reply (109) is indicated by the i stroke, its final and most prominent sound. In special (110), sh is omitted ; froin tliis word we derive especially (110«) by adding the ay stroke before sp, while the initial ay stroke is omitted for specially. For the same reason, specify will be written by replacing I of special with the i stroke, as the syllable if is omitted, in compli:uice with the rules of the preceding lesson. Specialty will consequently consist of sp and the final y stroke ; speciality (1106) is composed of .sp and the ity sign. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 69 Ordinal Numbers are written by adding the th circle, wherever it most conveniently joins, to the respective Arabic numerals. Compare the first figure with the second in 11th, 22nd, 38d, 44th, 55th, 6t)th, 77th, 88th, 99th, 100th, and 1000th— in the latter,the th circle is of course written after tlie thousand mark. Phrasing. We have seen in Lesson 10, that th in the and position reads and-the • this principle can be extended to a few more expedients. Shading i (for in) to indicate the " a " sound of and, will make it read and-in (111). Placing o (for of ) below the line in the u (for full) position, — in analogy with the term fulness, — we obtain full o/(112). The word fulness is written by adding ness to the logogram for full. Placing v (for very) low, in which position much would stand, we obtain very-much (113). Writing v high, in consideration of the vowel- sound of little, will make it very-little (114). Rejjlacing the out dot in about by th (for the), will make the outline read about-the (115). Writing th under the line, reads under the (116), and writing th above a word reads above the, as shown in the phrase above-the-house (117). It will, of course, not be wrong to write the outlines for under or above as shown in the preceding lessons, but the expedient here given is safe and brief. When the aiv (for was) curve is absorbed by h (for he), the outline — which of course stands above the line — will read he-was (118), which compare with was-lie (119). By placing the same outline low, we will read who-ivas, while shading it in addition will make it how-was (120). At the beginning, phrasing should be studied very carefully ; if this is done according to the examples and illustrations given, you will soon be able to construct for your own use phrases which occur frequently in your particular line of work, without being obliged to memorize hundreds of phrases, as they will often be found in shorthand text-books. Let us now consider a few words which are frequently found in all lines of work. The substitution of "oo" for '.'yu" will enable us to write quickly such groups as shall- you (121), which is written shall-oo, and is just as plain, besides saving the cross stroke. See also do-you-say (122), did-you-see (123), inform-you (124), and I-tell-you (125) — where i and t, and I and u are blended ; as usual, it is not necessary to write double I in tell. The u blending can also be used to advantage initially, where it is shorter than the crossing ; you- have-said (126) : you-may (127). In you-bake (128), you-tell (129), etc., the crossing is em- ployed, as blending cannot be resorted to. We have already seen that medium t can be blended with s in phrases like to-save (130) and to-settle (131) — note how t of settle deviates a little in slant, as otherwise the s loop with t (to) could not be formed. In order to join t (for to, but not for too) with all ujiward strokes, medium t is shortened, as in to-have (132), to-him (133), to-me (134), to-come (135), as-to- his (136), to-which-the (137)— w is included here because its initial curve starts a little below the centre-top-line, and is therefore traced upward for a short distance before it assumes a downward direction. Compare to-go-therc (138), to-gather (139), and together (140) ; although the latter is one word in longhand, it comes, like some other words, under the heading of phrasing, being composed of two separate shorthand outlines. In is, we have another frequent word ; is-great (141), it-is-great (142)* — formed in accord- ance with it-is, see Lesson 10, (207) ; compare this outline with it-is-so-great (143), where s of so — following s of is — has been omitted, in accordance with the rule for double consonants. He-is-not (144), written really his-not, is formed on the same principle as it-is-not, and will not clash with hls-not. The sound of the words this-is (145) can evidently be expressed by replacing the s circle of this by the double s circle (145a). Applying the double circle in the phrase is-this (146), we obtain also a very brief outline. Look carefully at the phrase is-the (147a), which, if we add th to s, would look like (147) ; as the two small circles in succession are not very handy, we consolidate them into one circle of the same height as the double circle, but made in the th direction, and call it therefore the double th circle. Note the difTer- ence between ivhich-is (148), ivhich-is-this (149), and ivhich-is-thc (150). The usefulness of the double s and double th circle is well illustrated by the phrases is-this-not-so (151), ivhy-is-the (152), and ivhy-is-this-xo (153). The double th circle can also be used conveniently in groups like as-the (154) — which compare with at-tlic (155), and asthc-same (156), which would other- wise necessitate three small circles in succession ; note also as-fhose (157). * If it is desired to write it's great, an apostrophe is used. 70 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. We have seen before that in is often represented by the initial ee stroke ; this can also be applied to phrasing; in-the (158), within-the (159), in-all (160), in-my (161), in-question (162), and (notice particularly) in-full (163). However, the ee stroke cannot be employed where it would clasli ; compare in-their (164) with either (165) {either may also be pronounced eyether, when it is begun with the i stroke), also in-his (166), and in-ivhom (167), — wliere the ee stroke below the line would indicate u. Compare in-this-much (168) with in-as-much (169) ; for the sake of distinction, s is shaded in the latter word. As illustrated by it-is and he-is^ s alone can be used to indicate is ; consequently, by add- ing it to there, the outline will become there-is (170)— which will not clash with theirs : as- there-is-not (171). Thr (for there) blended with was, will make the outline read there-was : there-ivas-not (172). Shading r of thr will make it read they-are (173) : as-they-are (174) ; compare this with they-were (175). Adding to tlir another r shaded, making thrr (the double r being shaded), we obtain there-are (176) : as-there-are (177). In phrasing, it can be shortened, so that it reaches only from the top- to the centre-top- -line ; it-{has)-heen (178) — where has is omitted : it-has (179) : it-had-not-been (180) : it-was-not- so (181) ; note also not-it (182). The auxiliary verb have may be omitted wherever it is implied by grammatical considerations ; ive-must-{have)-heen (183) : they-cannot-{have)-been (184) : they-could-not-{have)-been (185) : we-should-not-{have)-had (186) : you-would-not-{have)- bcen (187) : they-should-{have)-had (188) : fhey-should-nof-(have)-had (189) : to (have)-been (190) : to-[have)-had (191) : yoa-)night-not-{Jiave)-been (192). Note have-you-been (193)— i/o« expressed by the crossing of h and n {been) ; compare this with you-{have)-been (194), where h is omitted. See also coidd-you-{have)-been (195), shoidd-you-{hav€)-becn (196), could-you-not-{have)-been (197), should-you-{have)-had (198), coidd-you-{have)-had (199), could-you-not-{have)-had (200). Compare carefully where-{hav()- you-been (201), how-{have)-you-been (202), and tahat-{have)-you-been (203) ; to distinguish these from ivhere-you-{have)-been (204), hoiv-you-{have)-been (205), and ivhat-yon-{have)-been (206), we effect the crossing in the latter three — similarly to you-have-been — by means of the connective vowel-stroke, which admits of placing been in the regular position. These com- binations, which are brief enough for verbatim reporting, should be well studied, for they occur often and are always uttered rapidly. Ever should not be phrased ; see the difference between ivhatever (207) and ivhat-ivere (208), luhichever (209) and whleh-were (210), lioxvever (211), how-were (212), and how-are (213) — showing that shading /• in these groups will turn were into are. When ever starts a phrase, as in ever-since, or when it is preceded by so, it can be phrased ; as the o is not accented, it can be omitted, admitting of blendings ; ivhat-so-ever (214), which-so-cver (215), where-so-ever (216), how-so-ever (217), ever-so-much (218). When .so occurs thus medially and its vowel has no accent, o may be safely omitted ; so-far (219) : so-many (220) : so-great (221)— which compare with is-so-great (222), where o is accented. O always has the stress of the voice at the end of a phrase, in which case it must be written ; I-am-not-so (223) : perhaps-so (224) : it-is-so (225) : it-is-not-so (226) : if-so (227) : very-much-so (228) : he-was-so (229) ; observe how s forms a convenient connection in all these phrases. Also note who-said-so (230) and must-be-so (231), where s is blended with d and with 6. O is slighted by the voice, and is therefore omitted, when it occurs— as in or — between two words which can be phrased ; rich-or-poor (232), white-or-black (233) ; these phrases sound almost like richerpoor, ivhitcrblack, when quickly uttered. See how all and over are blended to read all-over (234), and how the double r is used in moreover (235). It is a fundamental maxim in shorthand, that the more familiar a word or a phrase is, the more it can be abbreviated : thus, dears, at the beginning of a letter, will hardly read anything but Dear-Sir (236), while s added to this will read Dear-Sirs (237). J (for the soft sound of g) in the same place, can read only Gentlemen. Miss is well represented by the prefix m,is, from which we derive Mrs, (238), by blending it with s. To distinguish this from Misses (239), we use the regular m and the double .s circle in the latter. Dear ma- {m shaded is a safe abbreviation for Dear Madam (240). Observe how the phrase in-compliance-ivith (241) admits of a convenient blending of com and with, so that only pliance is omitted. The ence stroke, starting from the line, stands practically for ansiver. Placing it high, to indi- cate the i (for in) sound, will make it read i-answer = in-answer (242), and blending it witl) GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 71 the i stroke, will make it I-answer (243). The commercial abbreviations inst {I. e., of this month and instance) are represented by a shorthand i. In-replij-to-you-favor would be incor- rect, and this phrase can only mean in-replij-to-your-favor (244) ; consequently, both to and the /■ of your are omitted, while you is expressed by crossing the i of reply with the/ of /avor. The following Reading Exercise should be carefully studied with the aid of the. annotations. The phrased groups should receive particularly careful attention : — (245) Mr. S. C. Owens, Detroit, Mich. (246) My-dear-Sir :— I-am-in-receipt-(of)-your Hues of-the 6th inst., and-in-reply-(to)-your favor, I-take-the liberty to-say : — (247) Since-my last report, I went myself to-see the driver, and, as-said-before, asked- him what he-knew about-the transaction. (248) He-had-no receipt to-show-for-the ship- ment ; I-am-not-sure whether-or-not I-told-3'ou-so iu-my previous letter, and therefore I- mention-this-again, so-as-to remind-you of-all-the particulars. (249) However, I-am-sure it-will-be-no impossibility to-find-out very-soon who-is to blame-for-the blunder, though it- will-not-be an easy task. (250) Unfortunately, this odd, so-called Division Examiner, who speaks so-much about-the emancipation of-the laboring class, did-not want to-lay-the matter before-the committee of-the federation to-secure their co-operation in-the prosecution of-the directors of-the corporation. (251) He-says it-is-impossible to-lose, and we-will win easily ; but I-am-not-at-all-disposed to-think so because he-says-so, though I-hope I-may-be mistak (en). (252) In-compliancewith-the request of-your committee, I-send-you also a pamphlet for-your inspection. (253) Tiie local Union of Operator(s) is-considering the advisability of distributing a-few thousand of-them in-this-city, and we-hopeyou-will send-us an organ- izer to systematize the movement. (254) This-is-the wish whieh-all-the representatives expressed, at-the last meeting, and we trust-you-will see-j^our way clear to-give-us a good man. (255) Under-the proper management, it-seems-possible that we-can accomplish our end. (256) Without-any further news for-the-present, I-remaln (257) Yours-tru(ly), (258) Herman Wendel, Bowers, (259) Secretary, Grand Lodge. Annotations. — The address of this letter shows how the initials S and C are distin- guished according to their sounds, the former being written c.s, and the latter see. Z would be written in the same manner, except that the circle would be smaller. For the other initials, the Graphic characters of the alphabet are written just as in longhand ; for g, its alphabetical (g), not its phonetic equivalent {]), must be written. As to the vowels, the a dot (with initial and final stroke) stands for a, the ay stroke for e. The others are self-ex- planatory. In Owens, observe how the short "ay" sound after o is expressed by the shad- ing of 71. Look at the brief, but complete, outline for Detroit (dtroif) : long t is placed low only when it precedes an " oi" sound; otherwise it does not change position. Note the outline for Michigan, abbreviated to Mich., in accordance with the longhand abbreviation. This principle may be applied to all names of States and Territories. (246) See how conveniently i and t (of take) blend in the phrase I-take-the. (247) Also notice the blending of the ence stroke and «i to form since-my. In as-said- be/ore, only one s is written. (248) See how sh and / are phrased in to-show-for-the. Also observe the group I-am- not-sure, which, though not brief so far as actual length is concerned, can be traced very rapidly, and represents all the logograms and words in the phrase ; compare the blending of sh with the downward t (as in this phrase), and the blending of th with upward t, as in that-she, Lesson 10, (195). Whcther-or-not is actually written whetherernot. I-told-you-so can also be traced at verbatim speed, likewise I-mention-thi.^-again, where / is phrased with the logograms for mention, this, and again. Note the omission of o in so-as-to, and the con- venient blending of you in remind-you. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. (249) Compare I-am-sure, where 7, m, and sh are blended, with I-am-notsure\ also compare the groups it-will-be and it-will-not-be. Note the shortened t joined to find, and see how conveniently the out dot is added. See also how easily the long n stroke joins with v (for very) by means of the s ; observe the same convenient joining in task. Blame is in most cases followed by for, which blends with the former nicely, as shown in blame-for-the. All these phrases are of very frequent occurrence, and the fact that they can be written at verbatim speed will greatly help the student, and will permit him to write other and longer words in full. (250) Look carefully at the word odd, starting with o, followed by d, shaded to indicate the "a" sound of o ; if this were not done, the outline would read ode. Observe o omitted in so-called, admitting of blending s and k. Division has the soft sound of sh, but we sub- stitute the hard sound, writing the word divition, resulting in a short outline. Notice the (unaccented) / omitted in emancijKition, where ence and p are consequenth' joined. The phrase to-lay-the will be found very convenient to the hand, as is always the case when t is followed by I or th. Strictly speaking, com, in committee, should be followed by ty placed high ; the syllable sounds like ity, however, and is therefore so written. In federation, the second e is omitted. See how conveniently t[o) and s (of secure) can be joined. Compare co-operation and corporation, the first r being omitted in the latter ; also see how clearly the i in directors is expressed by d{r) extended above the line. (251) Observe again the convenient phrasing of t and I in to-lose. We-will is phrased by joining I to iv ; the outline could not be taken for tvail, as the latter Avord would have no meaning in this sentence. In easily, you will notice that only the last termination is written. I-am-not-at-all-disposed is a frequent phrase, and as shown by the shorthand out- line, is completely written at verbatim speed ; see how easily disp> (of disposed) joins with all, and how readily medium st is employed in the latter word. To-think shows again how easily t and th are phrased, — t being written first, of course. Observe also the groups it- miist-be-so, he-says-so, I-hope, and I-may-be. (252) See how I and u are added to send, to form I-send-you. Look at the convenient outline for pamj)hlet, where a mph is replaced by e and m2ih (= mf) blended. (253) Operator is literally written opratr ; the context clearlj' indicates that the word should be operators, and s need not be written. Look at the phrase is-considering, where is is utilized to form the initial part of con ; this is a perfectly safe and very convenient device ; observe also how r, though blended, is clearly distinguished. Also note how the ity sign is utilized in in-this-eity, where .s is written only once. Look at the phrase loe-hope-you-will, where u blends conveniently with x> and is crossed by the vowel-stroke of will. See how con- veniently lis is added to send. R is omitted in organizer, as is also the second t in system- atize. (254) Note representatives, formed by adding the prefex r and the termination ives to p?' (log. for present). (255) Compare it-see7ns-2)Ossible, where s in seems has been omitted (because it must be implied), with the phrase it-is-imj^ossiblc in (251). Also, note in accomplish the initial ay stroke, to indicate which, the initial stroke of com is raised from the line. (256) Without, having the same outline as with (except that tvithout stands low), is phrased in the same manner as ivith. I-remain could not be mistaken for I-mean at the end of a letter. (257) See how yours is joined to true, which in this connection can mean nothing but truly. (258) In Bowers, the ow dot must be employed, as it is followed by another vowel. (259) In secretary, ar is omitted. Compare lodge with the outline for large (76) ; the latter has a longer sound, the connective vowel-stroke between I and J is therefore longer than it is in lodge. Before progressing further, you should be able to read the letter without hesitation, just as though it were printed in type, and should also be able to write it at a speed considerablj' greater than your speed for longhand writing. But never forget that your outlines must be clear and neat ; otherwise, speed is useless. Lesson ii. ^/\ I /o ^p r^ /^ "" w^^^-Tg^ V^^ -t^ -e^ f /?^ Q/)/-- -> 3o C-f..C^ <. ^^T-^.^-^.^ ^^ /o6 1/3 . c r/ . ^ ^ 5- jG P-^_ 75- <^^ ^.^ J:^ ^r^zy /(I ^y^f '^f^ '^ ^' -^ i-^s^ ^v? :ie^ V ^■^ ^ ^ . 7 ^/ (Cv /^-^ r^Z 2^0 ^ ^^""■■i^^^'^^' f^ t^ ^r> UL ^^lOr^ y^ /^ ^ s^ t^^ /^-w^ i^ jC^--^ iAa -^ 707r>-v-^ V XK ^^ ^ -^ .9^. r^/0 ^^, ( 7. A ■ "w^ ^ .^ n^ ^^ -^^ '% / ^ L -o-^^. /■^ 7^ -?-g7. 72^ r. ilex. ^^ ^ ■^^ iJ-^ ^j6 ^ xsK o XS-, i \ c^ 6/t^j ^^ J-y /€ ^; L 74 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Writing Exercises. {A) Trenton, N. J., May 6, 1896. Mr. Arthur^ G. Spencer'^ Toledo, O. Dear Sir : — Permit-me to introduce' the bearer, Mr. L. F, Brewer, of New- York, who visit(s) your city on an extended tour through the Middle West. He is especially interested in-the- manufacture of artistic catalogues* for first-class houses^ in-your section, and would-like to be introduced to-the secretary of-the Printers' Association, which introduction I-hope^-you- can procure for hini. Mr. Brewer is-an old friend-of-iniue, and any favor you-raay-be-able to-show-hini, will-be very-much appreciated by Yours truly, Frank Humphrey. (B) Boston, Mass., June 23, 1898. Messrs. Jos. Fletcher & Bros., Seattle,' Wash. Gentlemen : — In-answer-(to)-your-favor-of-the 8th inst., we wish to-say tliat we should-not- (have)-been so disappointed about the non-arrival of-the goods, if we had-not-had-the con- signment advertis(ed) in-all-the papers. We-are therefore exceedingly sorry about-the delay, which-will, in-all-probability, cause us-a great loss. Could-you-not-have dispatch (ed) a special car, when we-telegraph(ed)-you to-send-us at- least-some-of-the lots? We- were very-much embarass(ed) through your action; and in-as- much (as) we-are-not at fault in-this-matter, we-are-not inclined to-stand-the^ loss alone. For-this reason, we-must ask-you-for-a' reasonably liberal allowance. Under-the circum- stance(s), we trust that-you-will-grant it, and that it-will-be considerably above-the-custom- ary^° average. We-hope that-you-will seethe advisability of shipping all goods in future strictly in- compliance- with-our instructions, so-as-to avoid all complications and delaj'S. Yours trul3', Albert Myers & Co. (C) Erie, Pa., July 17, 1898. The North- Western Navigation Co.. Duluth, Minn. Gentlemen : — Will-you-oblige-us" bj'^ kindly giv(ing)-us what information you-may-have about-the ability, character, and financial responsibility of Mr. Morris Winner, of-your city, who-has appli(ed) for our agency for-the territory'^ in-which we-were formerly represent(ed) by Messrs. Frank Victor & Co. ? We-shall-be-pleased to return the favor and we thank-you-in advance for giv(iug) this matter your attention. Await(ing)-your early reply, we-remain, Yours truly. The Lake Steamship Co. Annotations.— In Arthur^, final r is blended with th. Use ence stroke.^ Substitute oo for u.^ Write kat, and connect g by means of the o.* Use double s circle, placed low and shaded.* Blend p and u.^ Do not neglect to shade the V Trace stand upward.* Cross k (of ask) with f.^ Place (he above customary}" Write es for ;/.§." Omit the medial syllable it}^ GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. lO Lesson No. 12. As shown in the preceding lesson, two points must be kept in view when an increase in speed is aimed at : tliat the contraction of outlines niu^^t be safe, — that is, tlie full outhnes must be contracted in such a manner tliat tlie sliortened outline will uneciuivocally suggest the correct word ; phrasing must be attempted only in those outlines whicli readily admit of it. There are some frequently recurring words of three or more syllables, which can be shortened by followini^' the voice. In coDDtinnicalion (1), for example, uie is slighted by the voice, and can, therefore, be omitted ; comrau ation could not mean anything else. The same principle applies to the section id, in eandidafe (2) — written eandate, — and in dividend (3) — written divend. In immediately (4), very little stress is laid on dicde, and these letters can be omitted, leaving a suggestive and unmistakable outline. The same reasoning applies to difficulty (5) — written diffy, and to several (6) — where sev has the stress of the voice. As indicated by several, in some of these words, the beginning indicates the word so clearly that it is not necessary to write the remainder: it is, for example, always safe to write merely under, to indicate the word understand ; to use the prefix inter, for interest; super, for superintendent; contra for contradict ; to write recipro for reciprocate (7)/ quo for quotation (8). This shortening of words can be applied especially to familiar phrases. When less is phrased, for instance, as in m,uch-less (9), more-or-less (10), nevertheless (11), unless (12), etc., s may be dropped, the short ay stroke, indicating the vowel-sound, being retained. Instead of writing case in full, we simply write k (for c) ; this applies, however, only when the word is phrased. Compare in-case (13), in-a-case (14) — note the ay stroke between the two words, in-this-case (15), and in-som,e-cases (16). In such cases cannot be phrased, as such is best written alone. See also in-no-case (17), and in-all-cases (18). In the phrase is- this-not-{the)-ease (19), the article is omitted, as it is necessarily implied in this combination ; the same applies to if-this-is-{the)-case (20), which compare with if-this-is-so (21) ; note also circumstances-{of-the)-case (22), where of-the may be omitted. In accordance with the above principle, we drop the ence stroke in at-oncc (23), joining the ay (for at) stroke with w placed low (indicating the " u" sound). "We eat in-o to live" will certainly read, "We eat in order to live" ; in-order, therefore, can be shortened as shown in (24), and, as this combination is always followed by to, we need not write the latter, and may read the outline in-o, " in order to-^'' In the same manner, ivell can be represented in familiar groups by its initial letter alone ; not very well (25) : full tvell (26) : just-as well (27) : it-is-ivell-knoivn (28). In none of these groups can tv be mistaken for ive, as the latter would have no meaning. " I beg to ha you" requires no guessing ; it reads, " I beg to hand you" ; nd is dropped in hand, and the vowel-sound is expressed hy shading h, as usual ; to-hand (29) : at-hand (30) : in-hand (31) : on-hand (32). Applying this rule also to that (33), which is a very frequent word, we can phrase the latter very conveniently ; that-I-have (34) : that-I-hand-you (35) : thaf-I-{havc)-bccn (36) — which compare with thine (37) : that-I-say (38) : that-I-see (39) : that-I-am (40) : that-I-may (41) : that-I-am-not (42) : that-is (43) : that-is-{to)-say (44) — where to is omitted and s is written only once; the phrase will not clash with that-is-a, which would also have a shorter ay stroke. Note also fhat'f< (45) — written on the same principle as else ; that-is-so (46) : that-ii<- {the)-case (47) : by-that (48) : for-that (49) : that-his (50) : that-in-his (51) : that-in-this (52) : that-this (53) : that-this-is (54) : that-is-the (55) : is-fhat (56)— note the double th circle : in-that- case (57) — which compare with in-the-case (58) : of-that (59) : ail-that (60) : how-was-that (61) — where h has absorbed the aiv curve, and admits of being joined with th (shaded) : who-ica-'^- that (62). 76 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Since th iu the and position reads and-the, and since th sliaded reads that, th shaded and in the and position will logically read and-that ; and the double th circle shaded and in the and position will read and-that-the. Look with particular care at the outline for that-the (63), where we can evidently employ the double th circle shaded, so that (63a) reads that-the. Note the difference between they (64), that-a {65}— th being shaded in the latter, and that-they (66). In analogy with the groups of are, explained in the preceding lesson, we can now form convenient groups for such phrases as that-they-are (67), wliich compare with they-are, Lesson 11, (173), and as-they-are (68) ; note also that-they-were (69) : there-are (70) : that-there-are (71) : that-there- are-not (72j : ivas-thai-the-man (73). There are a few cases in which no advantage would be gained by this contraction of that, and it might then be just as well to write it out in full. That-you-are (7-1), for example, can be written most conveniently^ by crossing t (of that) with r. In the above examples, the initial part of the word has been used ; the word time (75) is best abbreviated by writing the final part, which, in accordance with the rule, must stand above the line to show that it is the end of the word. Time occurs in many familiar groups, and can therefore be phrased ; such-time (76) : some-time (77) : foi'-some-time (78) : every-time (79) : at-what-time (80) : in-ivhich-time (81) : in-all-that-time (82) : at-the-time (83) : at-that- time (84) — th shaded : as-that-time (85) : as-the-tirne-for-the (86) — note how conveniently time and for are blended : at-thc-time-for-the (87) : in-the-course-{of)-tlme (88) : {a)-question-{of)- time (89) : from-that-time-on (90) : at-all-times (91) : in-the-'mean-time (92) : some-time-ago (93) : length-{of)-time (94). If next-time (95) is written in one outline, one t would be suppressed ; consequently, t of next is also dropped in phrasing (according to the rule on double conso- nants) ; this rule applies to every case where tiyne, when phrased, is preceded by a t stroke ; last-time (96) : night-time (97). Both a-question-of-time (89) and for-the-Vnne-heing (98) occur alwaj's in the same combination of words ; in the former, therefore, a and of are dropped, and in the latter, for-the is omitted. The question as to whether the initial or final part of a word is to be used is not arbi- trarily settled ; a comparison of the abbreviations for hand and that with the contracted outline for time, will show that in the latter word the final part is smaller than is the initial, and also admits of convenient expression of the vowel-sound. This rule should be borne well in mind, since it is of great importance in the contraction of outlines, as will be shown later. Day (99) is another word which may be represented by its final sound ; Ave write simply the ay stroke above the line. This, again, aj^plies only to familiar groups. The stroke should be made of good length, to indicate the long sound of "ay". If we add it to the shortened to, we obtain to-day (100). The same stroke can also be used in writing the names of the days of the week ; Sunday (101) : Monday (102) : Tuesday (103) : Wednesday (104). In Friday (105) and Saturday (106), day is evidently more conveniently written in full, as shown by the outlines. If we place the outline for to-dny below the line, in the " oo" position, the vowel-stroke will indicate the " oo" sound, so that the phrase reads to-do (107) ; to-do-so (108). Only in the phrase to-do, however, is do thus written ; in all other cases, the logogram is employed. As mentioned in the previous lessons, icifh and without, having practically the same outline, are phrased in a similar manner ; observe especially ivithout-you (109) : ivithout-their (110) : without-your (111) : without-this (112) : ivithoid-us (113). Note another (114) : one-another (115) : from-each-other (116) : from-other (117) : from- one-another (118). In the last phrase, you will notice that the lo of one is omitted, n standing low, as usual. One is phrased by simply adding n to the preceding word, slanting downward (indicating low position) ; {a)-black-one {\l^) : {a)-great-one {120) : {a)-big-one (121). When n cannot be joined thus, this low position may be indicated by placing n under the preceding letter; any one (122) : every one (123) : no one (124) : some one (125). In sucli a one, the ay stroke would stand between such and one, so that such cannot clash with some. We have seen before that one word may indicate another which has been omitted, as in the case of /w^^o/, for example. This principle can also be applied to such words as some body else. Since some body (126) is written by some (contracted) and the final y stroke above the line (for body), we write some body else (127) by replacing body in some body with else. In other words, we write som,e, adding else in the position in which body would stand. To write some one else (128), we place else in the position where n (for one) Avould stand, — viz., under some. Note also any body else (129) and any one else (130), nobody else (131) and no GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 77 one else (132), every body else (133) and every one else (134). On the same principle, we form nowhere else (135) and everywhere else (136), in whicli plirases, because of tlie "ay" sound of where, else stands on tlie line. This I'eversed s is doubled, of course, like the regular s ; some body else's (137). Thing is phrased similarly to its logograms ; that is, in anyihiny^ the two words must be separated ; see not-for-any thing (138), where thing, tliough below the line, is placed high in relation to any. Note also for-everything {lo9), for- nothing (140), and J'or-soniething (141). Compare they-can-have-something (142) with they-can-have-some (143). In such groups as ivhere about — or where abouts{\-ii), there about (14o), what about (146), etc., the ay stroke may be omitted, the ow dot being placed below the first word ; no clasii can be possible, as there are no similar combinations with out. Note also what about lite (147), what about that (148), and how about that (149). About it (150) is formed in the same manner by writing it under the ay stroke, which, for this purpose, is raised to the top-line. The same principle is also extended to such phrases as about which, about what, about them, etc. Since in-a-u-days will at once suggest the phrase in-a-few-days (151), it is unnecessary to write / of few, the " u" sound being expressed by crossing in with the long ay stroke which indicates day ; after-a-few-days (152) : in-the-course-{of-a)-few-days (153) : for-afew-dayx (154). Compare the last phrase with a-few-days (155), where the short ay stroke (for a) and the long ay stroke (for day) have been joined into one stroke. It is unnecessary to add s to day ia any of these groups, as the plural is implied by the word few. In the same manner, d may be dropped from duly, in such familiar phrases as I-have- duly received (156), they-have-duly noted (157), etc. Wifh-a-u-to can be only with-a-view-to (158), and the same holds good of ivith a-view-of (159) — where a and o (for of) are crossed. When the crossing cannot be done conveniently, the words are written in full. The relative pronouns m,yself, yourself, themselves, etc., when referring direct to the subject of the sentence, may safely be replaced b.y I (without the final stroke) joined to the- preceding woi'd, thus omitting my, your, them, etc. ; he may do it-himsrlf (160) : we j^ride- ourselves on {having) been on-hand in-f ime-for-the-fight (161) : every one should fit-himself for- a useful occupation (162) : did-you hide-yourself ? (163). There is a number of short phrases, where the first and last words are alike ; such are day-by-day (164), {from)-day-to-day (165)*, {from)-time-to-time (166)*, higher and higher (167), by and by (168), etc. As shown by the examples, the last word may be omitted from these phrases, the space which it would occupy being left blank to indicate plainly the omission. This device can be employed only when the word omitted has previously occurred in the same phrase ; the phrase from bad to worse, for instance, would not come under this rule. As said before, superfluous words, which must be implied by the gram- matical construction, are omitted ; under this heading come such phra.ses as as-soon-{as)- 20ossible (169), as-far-(as) (170), as-good-(as) (171), etc. FRACTION.S are written just as in longhand, but the figures should be made small, :iiid the division stroke is omitted ; the fraction being indicated by the lower position of the denominator :— 2 3 ; ^ \q. Very little need be said about Compound Words, which consist of two or more primitive words, each of which has a meaning when standing alone ; for example, car-load, show-case. Since words that belong together can be phrased, compound words will logically come under the rules for phrasing, — that is, thej- are written in one outline when they join conveniently ; otherwise, each word stands separately. In joining them, blending can be resorted to as in phrasing, and when two similar consonants meet, one is omitted ; observe the blending of ence and ?«, in dancing-master (172), where ing, being superfluous, has been omitted. Note also the blending of d and ji in lead-pencil (173), and the omission of one p in hip-pocket (174). The same principle applies to reading- room (175) — written read-room, — where d and r are blended. The usual attention and study should be given to the examples furnished by the fol- lowing exercise and explained by the annotations : — * The word from, being an integral part of these phrases, may be omitted. 78 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Reading Exercise. (176j Messrs. Shoemaker & Logan, (177) Chicago, 111. (178) Gentlemen :— (179) Immediately upon receipt-(of )-3-our communication, we-duly informed-the City Brokerage Co. of-your decision as-to-the offer they-made-you in-their letter-of-yesterday, telling-tliem that-their quotations were entirely too high. (180) We-note your statement that, under-the circumstauces-of-the-case, we-should not-(have)-been so quielv to avail-our- selves of-tlieir proposition, but do-not under(stand) what-you-mean-by-that ; for, as \ve- wrote-you before, we found, upon investigation, that-there-was-uo-time-for-auy delay, and that-the-case called for immediate attention ; we therefore had to-act at-once. (181) We- Ivnow full well that-the deal is-not-so profitable as it-might-liave-been if-you-could-have-been here-yourself ; but, after considei'ation of-all-the aspects of-the-case, and of-all-that-can-be- said about-it, we-cannot blame-ourselves for-any mistake, as-the market at-the-time did- not-show any indications of a rise ; and, as we-were by-no-means certain as-to-the time in-which-we-could make otlier arrangements, we-thought-it-more advisable to be satisfied witii-a fair profit, tliau risk a sale without-any benefit whatever (182) Our experience in similar-cases, as-well (as) the opinion of-most of-the members of-the Exchange, justify-the disposition we-have-made in-your interest. (183) According to-our observation, and to-an intimation frora-a reliable source, the securities of-the Traction Co. will-not sell at-a premium within-tlie next-few-days, as-tlieir dividend, payable just about-this-time-of-the jear, is now overdue ; yet, we-tliink this-is-a first-rate investment. (184) As-per agreement, we-shall re-open our accommodation account by accepting your draft on-the loth prox., to-cov(er) your second pro rata payment, called for by-the-Uuited Gas Improvement Co. ; this-will liquidate-your obligation, except for-a small balance pay- able on-the 16th (of) August for-the remainder of-the prefer(red) stock. (185) Any further business witla-which you-may- be-good enough to favor-us will-have- our immediate attention at-the lowest rates, even if your order be unaccompanied by a cash remittance. (186) Yours resp(ectfully), (187) A. L. Haines & Bro. Annotations. — (176) In Shoernaker^ note m placed low and the k long. (177) Compare o^, in Logayi, with go, in Chicago. The latter is written in full, Shi- kaw-go ; but for practical purposes, it will be sufficient to write only Chie., just as in longhand. (179) See how letter and yesterday are conveniently phrased, — ?*, of letter, blending with o (of), which forms the connective stroke between the two nouns. In telUng-them, the ending ing is omitted, and ra (for them) is blended with tell. Since t is omitted in entire, it will also be omitted in entirely. (180) Note the saving by simply adding I (for selves) to avail, to form the phrase avail- ourselves. Compare the phrases, ive-wrote and we-note. In investigation, ti is omitted and s is blended to v. Look at the phi'ase that-fhere-was-no-time-for-any, which, with the excep- tion of the last word, occurs very frequently, and can be traced, like the majority of these common phrases, at verbatim speed ; au> (for ivas) is brought down from above the line, and the i stroke of time joins easily to the o curve of 710. That-the-case is also self-explana- tory and brief. Imm.ecliate will logically be written like immediately, minus the final ly ; im,m,e is an unmistakable contraction for this word. See how the initial vowel is clearly shown in to-act. (181) Note if-you-could-{have)-been / if we should want to write if-yoii-can, we should have to effect the crossing on the line, for that purpose, bringing the top of/ a little nearer the top-centre-line. Also take notice of the saving of outline in writing here-yourself and blame-ourselves. Note the phrases of-the-case and of-aU-that-can-be-said. Look carefully at the phrase did-not-show, where t (for not) and sh (for shoiv) are blended ; did-shotr would be written by placing sh in its normal position from the top-centre- to the bottom-line. Observe tlie phrases by-no-means, in-which-we-could, and ive-thonght-it-more. See how conveniently the logogram for fit can be used in 2^'>'oflt and benefit. Note how the s in arrangements is added to m (for ment). /o /^ Lesson 12. rh ^ r^r fyl Pe /T/ ^V '^^ ^ ^ "^ ^ ^ ^^ r ^ ^^ -^ r-^ '^- ' ^^ "^ " 1^ Q c o'^Oc^Zo - (J ^ Q^ \ CI i ^^. y//r^^r^ ^0 5^^ ^^ .^ ryt f^ /-^'-^ _c^ ji^^ .Ji^ ^ ^ 9^\y2 -^^ '^5^ / yes- /s-6 ^^ -. y2 . Z"^, ^- //^-^, ^ r^^ /?J^ C^Jr\ .X fjr^y < ^^ _ .. y^^ L ^T, "^^^^^/g^. ^ V ^, ^^y ^/ ^ "(-^ /i^.o C. ,^ fM. / ^^^ •/- /^^. .^vv^d^ L-^^\^ V>^ f^ — . " <^ ^-..„^ apiiearance, and ull-that-ean-be-said iu-its-favor*^ is-the-price. However, we-do-not-think it wise to-luy-iii" a stock (of-tlie) goods. If-you-care to-let-us- have-a consigniiieiit, we-shall-do everything in-our-power to dispose of-tlieni to-tlie-best-^ofj- your interest. Yours respectfully, £d\v. Warnek & Co. (Z>) Philadelphia, June 14th, 1898. The Walker & Jeffris Mfg. Co., Savannah, Ga. Dear Sirs: — In-reply-(to)-3'our-favor, we-can assure-you that-the-house in-question deserve(s) all-tlie confidence (of the) business-community^'*. Tliere-was a rumor current that-they-liave recently accept(ed) another partner, wlio-is-said-(to)-be very wealthy ; and, upon investiga- tion, we find-that-this-is-(the)-case. Trusting tliat-this information may-be-(of) service" to-you, we-remain. Yours truly, Rothermel'" & Hutchinson-^ {E) Trenton, July 18th, 1898. Messrs. Waring & Newton, St. Paul, Minn. Gentlemen : — We-have-an order from Messrs. Drake & Co., amounting to a considerable sum. We-bad an order from-them the-last-time our salesman went to-see them ; but, on ask(ing)- them for-a statement of-their affairs, they-wrote-us that-they-had concluded to-cancel the order. Although our impression of-their standing has always been favorable, we feel that- in-justice-^ to-ourselves, we-cannot assume-the responsibility of open(ing) so-large an account without niak(ing) the customary inquiries. We assure-you ihat-any information which- you may furnish-us will-be-kept strictly confidential, and that we-are ready to reciprocate, should opportunity offer. Yours very-truly, F. Connelly & Sons. Annotations. — ^ Shade t at the bottom in Tit, and for its whole length in Tat. ^ Join writing to h (for hand), bringing r a little below the line. ^ Start at the bottom. * Use the ay stroke. ^ Join d and out. ^The hyphen, indicating that out is phrased, does not mean that it should be joined to t (of it), but simply, that it is placed below it. ^ Scr (= skr) will absorb the aw curve. ^ Ud is dropped, in accordance with the rules on endings. 'Only one n is written in in-need. ^"^ Cross nk (for thank) with /, to form thank-you-for. '• Shade the consonant following I. '^ Blend mbr. '^ Apply the same principle as in communication; in being unaccented, may be omitted, leaving examation. " In accordance with the rules on endings, favorably is written fr (blended), the final y stroke being added. ^^ With may be raised to the top-line, so that it can be joined with its. ^^ In is raised to the top-line in a similar manner. *' /n should not be blended with a in this case, because, according to the sense, the two words do not belong together ;' the words to-lay-in belong together, however, and are phrased; take care that the ay stroke is clearly shown between I and i (for in). ■** Phrase on the same principle as /.•*- 'onsidering, in Lesson 11 (253). "In service, ice is dropped in accordance with rule (12), Lesson 11, ^"In Rothermel, rm must be placed low, '^^ The ence stroke, placed high, can be employed in Hutchinson. ^^ Justice is written by adding an s to Just (represented by the logogram J, placed low.) The names of cities may be considerably' contracted when they are familiar to the writer. Thus, Philadetphia can be shortened to Phila (= Fila), as in longhand ; Ketv York can be written by crossing n with y ; Savannah may be shortened to Sav, blending .9 (shaded) and v. In the case of cities less well known, these contractions should be resorted to only when they are of frequent occurrence in the correspondence of the writer. 82 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Lesson No. 13. In the course of the preceding lessons, in whicli only the most frequent words and phi'ases have been abbreviated, the student has progressed sufHciently to follow verbatim tlie usual business dictation or a slow speaker. In order to increase still further the speed of the stenographer, we will now consider a few principles of the reporting style of the system, still further reducing the outlines, so that he is fully qualified for the duties of an amanuensis. The Rui.es for Reporting Contractions are based upon the fact that all the words of a sentence stand in a certain relation to each other, which is so clear and distinct that the sense of the sentence would be destroyed, if one of the main words (a noun, an adjective, or a verb) should be replaced by another. For example, the phrase "Do not put the cart before the ho," will at once be read "Do not put the cart before the horse," particularly when we know that ho — according to the rules of Graphic shorthand — must stand for a word of one syllable. As said before, the contraction of words cannot be made at random, but is governed by well-defined (common sense) rules, according to which the missing part of the word is logically inferred from the written part ; there is no guess-work whatever in reading stenographic notes, provided they are written' correctl3\ For purposes of contraction, we classify words into three divisions, viz. : simple words, compound words, and derivatives. A simple ivord is one that has neither prefix, suffix, nor termination ; for example, state. A derivative is formed, when another syllable is added ; for example, estate, or stately. When a word is composed of two or more roots, each of which has a meaning when standing alone, it is called a compound ivord ; for example, statesman. For the present, we will consider only simple words of one syllable (which includes also some dissyllabic words, in which, in accordance with the rules previously given, the second syllable is omitted, so that for shorthand purposes the word is a monosyllable) : for instance, chick, for chicken; smit, for smitten; a.ud such words as matter, hither, etc., but only when the latter are used in common phrases. Since the contractions depend upon the relations of the various words in a sentence to each other, it is evident that, as a rule, words which are thus related to each other should not both be contracted at the same time ; the first is preferably written in full, and will then direct the thoughts of the reader so that he can readily read the contracted outline following: for example, the sentence "the gra is da this morning," is not very clear; but when we write the first word in full and say " the grass is da this morning," the shortened word is easily understood to be damp. Nov/ let us look at the shorthand plate, to see how this principle is applied in practice. Particular attention should be given to the outlines for frequent words and phrases. We will first consider only closed m,onosyllables, — that is, words which both begin and end with a consonant : such words are tact, goal, etc. Monosyllables that begin or end with a vowel, such as act, ov go, — are called 02:>en monosyllables. Initial Contraction is the name of the principle by which words of one (closed) syllable may be contracted, by writing simply the first consonant (or group of blended consonants), at the same time expressing the vowel-sound in the usual manner. Since you are familiar with the rules on the vowel-sounds, no further rules on this point are necessary ; it remains only to study the illustrations. A (as in man). (1) I stepped on a tack. — Tack is represented by shaded t, which is the whole word with the exception of the final k. Step is so closely associated with the word tack, that the latter suggests itself to the mind as soon as the eye sees the outline ta. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 83 (2) Cau-you draw a map of the United States of America? — Here again, map, drawing and the name of a country are closely and suggestively associated. Notice how conveniently we phrase the abbreviation U. S. A. (3) T-am-glad to-learn of-his success, but I-hate to-hear him brag about-it. — Am is neces- sarily implied between / and (jlad, since I-glad would not be English ; m can be omitted, therefore, admitting of phrasing / and gl {I shaded for glad). Notice also the contraction for brag ; this idea is readily suggested by the word .success. (4) The poor man was dressed in rags, and nearly dead from lack (of) food.— Note con- tractions of man and lack, and see how the vowel-stroke follows the initial letters, clearly showing that the vowel-sound is to be read after them. While this vowel-stroke is made with particular ease in letters that end with an upward stroke, it may also be used in letters that end in the downward direction. There is no need for it in initial contractions, however, unless for some particular purpose, as will be shown in the course of this lesson. As a rule, the beginner is inclined to use it freely; but in the majority of cases, he will drop it in- stinctively during actual practice. (5) I-regret that-the-case is-so sad, but-the fact is, that I-can-do-nothing-in-the-matter. — Fact and matter are very frequent words, and their contractions are given in this sentence. In the common i^hnise as a matter of fact, as, a, and o/ may be omitted, so that only the two nouns remain ; as phrasing and blending can be employed to the fullest extent in familiar groups, a matter-of-fact may be written simply by phrasing and blending the outlines for matter and fact, as shown by (6), resulting in a very brief, but perfectly legible, outline. Another fre- quent phrase is facts-{of the)-ease (7), where fact and case are conveniently joined. (8) The troops crossed the river on rafts and lighters ; but as the night was pitch dark, the major said he would-not-take-the chance, to let-the men charge up this liill. — Look care- fully at this sentence. Notice i-afts, and see how shaded r is followed by the vowel-stroke, so as to distinguish it clearly from are, although the latter word would not tit into the sentence at all. The contraction might read either raft or rafts ; but since the singular would have to be indicated by a preceding singular article, and since the word lighters (written in the plural) implies that there also was more than one raft, the plural of this word need not be indicated. The second part of this sentence illustrates contractions with the sound of A (as in bar). These are constructed like the preceding class, but in order to distinguish between the two " a" sounds,the contraction in the second case is placed high. This cannot mean a short ''1" sound, as the shading clearly indicates the "a" sound, as in dark (see pitch dark, above). Notice the difference between chance (shaded ch on the line) and charge (shaded ch above the line). (9) We shall guard our rights and our flag.— Notice shaded g above the line for guard ; alsoy? blended and I shaded for flag. (10) I-heard-the-dog-bark, and the watchman cry " Stop thief." — Note shaded ?^ above the line for bark. According to the same principle, are written also those words in which o has the "a" sound, as shown by stop, in which shaded st is above the line. This is shown by the next sentence also : (11) "He-is-a chip-of-the old block," said the father. Notice I in block, shaded and followed by the vowel-stroke. I. IFords with i (as in bite) are self-explanatory. (12) This-is-not a very sharp knife, will-you grind it?— Observe sh placed high and shaded. Although 7id is omitted from grind, the sentence is perfectly intelligible and will be read without hesitation. The word knife illustrates another principle, wliicli must not be lost sight of,— that is, it would not be worth while to contract knife, as the full outline can be written very speedily ; in all such cases, the word is written in full. (13) Be kind to-the blind man ; take him-home, for he-cannot tind-his- way alone.— Note the convenient ])hriiini find-/iis-iva)/. (14) To-my-mind, the child should-not-be struck with-a-stick, even-though he-be full-of pranks. — This sentence shows also a contraction with the /short, as in stick. When following a t, this sound can be conveniently indicated by shading t at the bottom. See how convenient and unmistakable is the contraction to-my- mind. It is not necessary to write the plural of pranks, as the context plainly indicates it. This word shows that only the long pr can be used for contractions, as the shortened pr (being on the line) might sometimes conflict with we-are. Therefore, all words starting 84 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. with initial pr are cousidered as starting with a large letter ; the importance of this rule will be apparent later. (15) Not only the poor, but also the rich, are within the reach of death; everybody must leave this world ; no one can live forever. — This sentence alTords an excellent illustra- tion of the difference between the final y stroke of only^ and the vowel-stroke of rich and live^ and reach and leave. The length of the vowel-stroke shows whether the vowel follow- ing r and I is short or long. (16) Please keep the paper containing this plea, carefully under lock and key. — Compare the contraction for please with the word pfea, and that for kee}:) with key. The contracted outlines show by the nature of their forms that they do not represent full words. Lock shows I placed high and shaded, to indicate the "a" sound of o. Please occurs in frequent phrases, where it is not necessary to pay any particular attention to the vowel-stroke. This is shown in (17) I-am-pleased to-hear that-he undertakes the task with so-much vim. — Note to- hear : at the first glance, the outline might seem to be to-him ; this would be so foreign to the sense of the sentence, however, that the reader would not take the outline for anything but to-hear. Hear and him might readily be distinguished by writing the vowel-stroke after h in hear; but, as was explained above, it is not necessary to take this precaution, unless there is danger of confusion (which occurs very seldom). See how Avell upward v can be used for vim, which word is thus clearly distinguished from very little (Lesson 11, 114.) (18) Enclosed please-find-the check. — Please-flnd-the is a very common phrase and can be traced rapidly. (19) " At the last election, our side did-not lose a seat," remarked the senator. (20) A stitch in time saves nine. (21) Observe the contraction of here in heretofore, and of hither in hitherto (22). (23) He-said-he would like to-flnd-out which-way the wind blew. O and Aw. (24) I-heai'd-the story a short-time-ago. — Short-time-ago is a very frequent phrase. (25) Who brought the package? (25a) The wagon of-the bargain store. (26) Among well-bred people, courtesy is-a matter-(of)-course. — Note how the group matter-{of )-course is phrased, of (a superfluous word) being omitted. (27) I-should-like to-have-the agreement signed, merely as-a matter (of) form. — Observe the group matter (of) form. In I-should-like, d is taken from its regular (low) position, which is permissible in phrasing. The outline cannot be mistaken for I-had, as d must be shaded in the latter. (28) What-is-the-cause (of the) trouble? Breach-(of)-peace, your Honor.— Observe the group ivhat-is-the- cause, and the outline for hreach-{of)-peace, in which br is placed high and phrased with peace. (29) The rock tore a hole in-the boat, which commenced to-sink. (30) I-should rather die, than bear a yoke. (31) The day was very hot, but it-was cool in-the-grove.— Note h placed high and shaded, on account of the " a " sound of o in hot. (32) We-wrote-you about-this before and consider the matter closed ; but since-you-call our attention once-more to-this-fact, it-seems you-have-not understood-us on-this point. — Observe the phrasing in this sentence, particularly since-you-call, once-more, to-this-fact, and it-seems ; see also how safely under represents the word understand. The last word in this sentence shows a contraction with the Oi sound. Point occurs very frequently in such combinations as 2^oint-{of)-fact (33), point-{of)-view (34), to-the-point (35). (36) When-the captain told the crew to-hoist the signal of distress, his-eyes were moist with tears. — Note the contractions moist and hoist ; in this connection, ti will not read any- thing but tears. U. (37) After last night's rain, the roads were full-of mud ; though the flood did-not-do much damage, our carriage sank into-the ruts many-(a)-tinie. — Note the difference l)etween mud and m-uch, the former having a short— but distinct — vowel-stroke. The context implies the plural of rut so clearly, that it is unnecessary to write it. Observe many-{a)-time, where a is omitted ; the outline cannot be taken for many-times, since s would be added to m in the latter. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. &5 (38) Money is-the root (of) all evil. — Compare root with rut (87) ; see how conveniently evil is written in full, by shading v at the top, bringing the final I a little to the left of v. (39) It-is-easy to write a verse, but it-is-another thing to write poetry. — Upward v is shown here in low jiosition, jiroving that words thus contracted cannot clash with very- much (Lesson 11, 113.) Notice also how clearly the second coalescent vowel, in poetry, is shown by the shading of the following consonant. (40) I-hope-you-are-in-possession of-the-goods sent-you, and hand-you-the bill for-thom herewith. — This is a very frequent commercial phrase. We have said before that it is not necessary to discriminate between long and short sounds, where no clash is possible ; it is, therefore, unnecessary to use the vowel-stroke in goodit. (41) The rim of a wheel travels faster than the hub. — This sentence was chosen as a good illustration of the principle, that it is advisable to write the initial part of a sentence in full and to contract the following words. You will read the ri, but you cannot say what word is meant, until your eyes strike the word w/iee^ ; then you will at once read the rim of the wheel. In hub, the vowel-stroke is used, although there is no particular need for it, as the h (low) in this connection cannot be read for loho or rvhom. (42) The bad news put him in-a gloomy mood. — Compare the long and short vowel- strokes in mood and mud (37) respectively. (43) The sloop sprung a leak in-the-gale. (44) The camera flend wished to take a picture-of-the-group of children. — The contrac- tion for ivished cannot read wishes, since s would be written in the latter, as will be shown later. (45) The foliage of-the weeping willow always droops.— Observe the coalescent vowel- sound in foliage. Compare the contraction of iveeiying with that of tvished (44). (46) The cook said she could not come before Thursday. — Cook, like knife, is just as easily written in full ; for this reason, the second k cannot be cook ; neither can it be could — could not could, — because it would have no meaning. K represents a word starting with A-, followed by a short " u" sound ; instinct chooses the word come (where o has this sound). (47) If all-those-wlio work for-their daily bread in-the-mines would merge their interests together, I-have-no-doubt about-the success of-our cause at-the-present-time. — Notice luork {wurk) and merge (murj), in both of which the ur blends readily with the initial letters. Together, which should be carefully noted, is actually written tog. I- have-no-doubt is a very common phrase, and shows how words with the Ow sound are contracted. (48) Please count this money over. (49) Nobody could identify-the drowned man at-the morgue. — Note dr shaded and placed low. Ay, as shown in the first lesson, is represented by simply writing the consonants in regular sequence. Such words, unless they begin with blended consonants, should there- fore be sparingly contracted, unless they are phrased, as otherwise they might conflict with some logograms. (50) A friend in need is a friend indeed. — Fr in this sentence could not read from, as the latter cannot be preceded by an article ; note how the repetition of this word is indicated by the = (equals) mark. (51) On-what-grounds does he base-his-claim? — Note the frequent phrase on-whaf- grounds. H [iov he), being phrased with does, cannot read have, although it is not in high position, as the latter would have no meaning in this connection. The same applies to base-his-claim (where s) of his (and k) of claim, flow nicely into each other. (52) A chain is-no stronger tlian its weakest link. — Chain is at once suggested by strong and link. It must here be remembered that in this class of words the vowel is not neglected, but is indicated by the regular position on the line. (53) It-is-human-nature to blame mistakes on other peojile.— Observe the group it-is- human-nature, where only one n is written. Observe also the contraction for blame. (54) This remark is entirely out (of) jilace. — The latter group is very common. (55) It-is-easier to become a slave to bad habits, than to adopt good-ones.— Observe the contraction for slcae. Note also how ones is added to good, as would be done if the word was written in full. (56) I-gave him ample means ; (at) any rate more-than enough to-see him-through.— As 86 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. illustrated hy I-gave, words with the medial "ay" sound maybe safely contracted to the fullest extent, when they are phrased. The frequent phrase at any rate can be abbreviated conveniently, though it cannot be phrased ; at may be omitted and ray will hardly read anything but rate in this connection. (57) We-beg-(to)-call your attention to-the-fact that-there-are-few houses which-can sell- you these goods as-low-(as) we-can. — When phrased, the word beg, frequent in commercial ]i!irases, is safely contracted to b. Note also the group that-thereare-feiv ; if it were that- there-are a-few, f would be crossed bj^the a stroke and could not be phrased with that-there- are; the latter verb implies the plural so clearly that it is unnecessarj' to add s to house. (58) I-beg-leave-(to)-say, that-I-have-made-out a statement, which-I-believe is correct ; the balance is |200.— . — This sentence offers some very important illustrations ; note tbe difference between I-beg leave and which-I-believe. See how made is contracted and phrased with out in that-I-have-made-out. Also observe the simplified mark for dollars {a). (59) I-should-be pleased to-get your check for the amount. — In this connection, to-ge cannot read together, but will at once be taken for to-get, which idea is closely related with the word check. (60) In round numbers, this transaction leaves about 15 per cent. — Round illustrates well the use of the vowel-stroke for purposes of distinction ; for, if it were not used here, at the first glance, the word would be taken for our. Note also the simplified form for % (a), where the first cipher is continued to form the diagonal fraction-stroke and the second cipher is omitted. (61) Will-you lilease let-me-see the letter? — Note the group let-me-see, in which let is contracted and the two long "ee" sounds are clearly shown. (62) Can-you tell-me when Mr. Nansen set-sail for-the North-Pole? — Notice how sug- gestive is the contraction set-sail. (63) The wounded man asked-me to-send-for-the physician. — The phrase to-send-for-the, though very brief, is very clear {to-se-for-the) ; if it should be read to-say-for-the, the ay stroke after s would need to be made considerably longer. The verb here must asked ; if it were asks, s would be written, and would afford a convenient junction with ???. (64) The thief fled across the border, so that-the detectives could-not lay-their hands on him. — Their implies the plural of hand, so that it is not necessary to add an s. (65) The stranded steamer was dashed to pieces by-the-waves. — This sentence again affords a good illustration of the correlation of words. If you have any doubt as to what stra steamier may mean, you will be set right as soon as you see the rest of the sentence. The last word in the sentence can only be loaves. (66) He said that-I-should make-good the loss.— Note the convenient groups he-said and that-I-should. Make-good is a very current phrase ; note how make is contracted, so that the outline reads ma-goo ; it cannot be mistaken for anything else, as there is no such word as moog. (67) When the train was wrecked, I-was thrown out (of the) coach and received a pain- ful sprain. — Train, ivreck, and coach, painful and sprain are also closely connected in sense. (68) She-gave-him a good answer. In the following Writing Exercises, the italicized words should be contracted. (Such words as hand, that, etc., are not italicized, but should be contracted, as shown before). (A) (Abridged from "The Man without a Country," by E. E. Hale). "I try io find heart^ and life to-tell-you that-it-is-all-over with dear old Nolan. . . . I- could^-see that-he-was-not strong, but-I-had-no idea that-the-end was-so near. The doctor bad-been watching him very carefully, and yesterday morning came to-me and told-me that Nolan was-not-so tvell, and had-not left his state-room. . . . Well, I-went in, and there-the poor fellow lay in-his berth, smiling pleasantly as-he-^avc-me his-hand, but looking very frail. I-could-not help a glance round,'^ which-showed-me what a little shrine he-had- made of the box* he-was lying in. The Stars and Stripes were triced up above and around a picture of Washington. . . . The dear old boy saw my-glance, and said,^ with-a sad smile, "Here, you-see, I-have-a country." And then he pointed to-the foot of-his-bed, where I-had-not-seen before a great maj:) of-the United States,^ as-he-had drawn it from memory, and which-he-had-there to-look upon as-he-lay. Quaint, queer old names were on Lesson 13 . ^^Z. , / ^ e. ^p. .oS5» .^ J?^. ^i^"^^,, .^ ^0/J. <^ 7 ^/ ^~. I ,- p ^-^^ ^^ ) • -/-- .^^^ >^/ ^^/<^^ /^V . .^ /^ tv^-v ^ xL^^-^^-^oZzr^ .V ..'■^^..p. x'^^A./^^^ /. /^Ay^-r s.^,^> ; ^. ^^^ ^r^., ^^. ^/y-^. ^"Y ' - ^ ^^^-^-/ ^^^' ^/x- - ^ :^-^^' ^'^ -^ rJ/^^^ L >>?. . ^ X ^ , - . .. %y7.-- n C - e/C<^ ^ ' ^' ^ ^" ^^V-^ X r /— ^ . ./^— -r^, ^x^ ^-.^ ■ '^^^— ^ -^/^^^^ ^ -f^--^ . '^ -^f^ ,--:^ -^ ^^^^ ^ >^..^. . '>^r...-y^ t:i,„ji^c^^ 7 ^^"^^ /^ - O ^ ^^/^ ^ ""^^N^ ^^...A - c/ ^^ ^ ^— / ^^ ^ <^^ ^. ^. ""^ ^ '^ -/Q^^ ^^J^- ^ ^^ ^^ ^ '^ "^^o -^ • ^/ ^-^^ Cor^ C ^r^') o 1, .. u'^\n^^ ry/. ^< ^^y^^, e .J \_o ■ c.^^. /^ e^J .^ ^ <^ ^2^- ^- r- y i— , ''^.. 9^^ , ./ ^ ^J ^ /^ .-^ J, ^ /^^/^. . t ^g^ v. ^ ,^y\^ -y-- n . '^ ^^.^ /^ ^/A - T ^^^^.^.^-.^^r^ ^. / ^ r^ ■^-^^^^\ ^-p"^ . 88 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. it in large letters: 'Indiana Territory,' 'Mississippi Territory,' and ' Louisiana Territory,' as-I suppose our fathers learn(ed) such things; but-the old fellow had patched' in Texas, too; he-had carried his Western boundary all-the-way to-the Pacific,® but on-that-shore he-had defined nothing. "'Oh,^ Danforth,' he-said, 'I-kno\v I-ani-dy(ing). I-cannot-^e^ ^"-/jome. Surely you- will-tell-nie-something now? Stop! Stop! Do-not speak till I-say, what-I-am-sure- you-know, that-there-is-not in-this-ship, that-there-is-not in America— God ftfess-her ! " — a more loyal 7ncm than-I. There-cannot-be a man who loves-the old flag as I-do, or pra3'(s) for it as I-do, or hopes for it as I-do. There-are thirty-four stars^'^ in-it now. 1-thank God for-that, though I-do-not-know what-their names are. There-has-never-been one taken away ; 1-thank God for-that. I-know-bj'-that that-there-has-never-been any successful Burr. Oh, Danforth, Danforth,'^* he sighed out, 'how-like a wretched night's dream'^*^ a boy's idea of personal fame or of separate sovei*eignty seems, when-one looks back on it after such a life as mine ! But tell-me — tell-me something — tell-me everything before I-die.' . . . "Ingham, l-told-Xww^'" everything I-could ^"^ think-of that^' would show-the grandeur of-his country ; but-I-could-not make-up my mouth to-telP*-him a word about-this infernal Rebellion ! "And he drank it in and enjoyed it as-I-carmot-tell-you. He grew more and more silent, yet-I-nevei'-thoiight he-was tired or faint. I-gave-him a glass (of) water, but he just wet his lips, and told-rae not to-go away. Then he asked-me to bring the Presbyterian * Book of Public Prayer,' which-lay-there, and said, with-a-smile, that-it would open at-the- right place, — and so it-did. There-was-his double red mark down the page." Annotations. — ^ Heart might be contracted, if it did not occur right at the beginning of the story. We have seen before that it is not advisable to contract too much at the begin- ning of a sentence, before the reader has become familiarized with the idea which is to be developed ; for the same reason, contractions should not be employed freely at the start of an article. ^ /and coidd should not be connected ; but k may be placed under ^, so that the hand need not go beneath the line. ^ Be careful not to omit the vowel-stroke following r (below the line and shaded) in the contraction for round: without the vowel-stroke, the word at the first glance looks like our, and though our does not lit into the sentence, it is best to avoid such stumbling-blocks. * It is best not to contract &o.r .• first, because shrine, which is associated with box to form one idea, is contracted ; and second, because it is not usual for a man to lie in a box. ^ Since it is not always necessary to write the past tense, said may be contracted to say. ® Write U. S., blending the two letters. 'It is best not to contract 2^atched, as it is used hei'e in a somewhat unusual connection. ® In Pacific, a sounds like short e; for this reason, p may be traced upward, admitting of shading/ at the top. ® Write the h in Oli, to avoid a possible confusion with of. '"The outline cannot be mistaken for I'Cannot-gohome, as in that case, o would be shown by the enlarged curve of g. '^ Bl is perfectly safe for bless, in the phrase bless-her. ^^ It is not necessary to indicate the plural in the contraction for stars, since it is implied by the number thirty-four. '^ The name need not be written the second time, as it may be replaced by the = mark. '* A vowel-stroke may be used after dr in dream ; this is scarcely necessary, however, as the word is closely associated with the idea of a wretched night. '^ Him need not be placed high in this phrase. ^®See ^ "One might be tempted to phrase think-of-that ; which would not be correct, since that and of do jiot belong together in this case. ^® Trace t (of tell) upward ; this is already indicated by the hyphen between to and tell, showing that the two words should be phrased. This could not be done if t were a down-stroke. It may also be observed as a general rule that, when a tale like this is related in the past tense, and the tense has been clearly shown in the beginning, no special attention need be paid to the ending ed, unless it can be written by blending t to y, nee, etc. [B) Pittsburg, Pa., September 17, 1898. Messrs. Wellington & Sons, Sioux City, la. Gentlemen : — In-reply-to-your-favor (of the) 12th inst., just to-hand, l-beg-leave-{to)-9,diy that-I- am-not inclined to certify '^-the bill (of) goods'^'' which-you-se?ii!-the firm, and will, therefore be-oblig(ed) to-send-them back by freight from-this-city. l-hope-you-wiW-he-kind enough GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 89 to-send-us-a copy of-the-order I-gave-you, as otherwise I-shall-not consider-inyself bound by-the agreement. As-soon-(as)-the paper comes ^i to-hand, I-shall-go over it carefully, and strike out^^ all-the-goods I-have-no-use for at-tlie present-time. The balance of the order will-be paid cash, either by a sight ^^ draft or by-check. Enclosed I-beg-(to)-hand-you a label of a new-brand ''* (of) ^roorfs which-(has)-been placed upon-the market here. Can-you ^ru'e-me any information about them?" I-should- like to-find out the name-of-the manufacturer, and hope-yon will-be-able to trace this- matter '-'« up. Yours very-tru(ly), John P. Dougherty." Dallas, Tex., December 13, 1898. The Texas Banking Co., San Anton io,^^ Tex. Gentlemen : — Your-favor of a-few-days-ago has-duly reached us, and we-?iofe^* what-you-say about-the draft which-will fall-^ne at-your bank on-the 19th inst. The drawee lurote us some-time-ago that-he had-not 7nade-up^^ h\s-mind as yet, as-to-whether-or-not he would pay it ; for, according (to) his-statement,-^' he-had-made a difFer(ent)^^ arrangement with Messrs. Higgins, Drake & Co. We-shall-write^^ to-him again in-thecour.se-of-a-few-days, and find out exactly what his intentions are in-regard to-this-ma^- which admit of shading at the top : (37) I-shall-get sea-sick as-soon (as) I-set a foot aboard-the ship. — Aboard has the true " o" sound, and r may, therefore, be omitted. Ip will hardly be taken for anything but ship. The same facility for shownng the vowel-sound is afforded by t and / in ite and ife. By contracting such words as light, life, etc., no great saving would be effected ; hence these GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 93 words are best written in full ; the contractions ite and ife are used only when the word starts with blended consonant.-* : (38) Tiie old man said that-he would-like to-die, for he-is weary of-the bitter strife, and should-Iike to-tind peace in-the-other world. — Compare the final contraction for strife with the initial contraction for find; the two are clearly distinguished from each other, the former being/ in the i direction, the latter, / followed by the / stroke. As explained in the preceding paragraph, ife cannot be taken for life. See how the phrase in-the-other shows ther placed lower than th (for the), thus indicating the short " u" sound of other. (39) The impression produced by-his speech was very slight. — Ite cannot here mean light, because that word would be written in full ; alight is the only other word which could make sense in this connection. The most frequent word which comes under this rule is quite: (40) Although-my opponent says that-this-is-not-so, I-am-quite-sure that-this-is-quite-so, and I-think I-can easily prove that-he-is-not quite-right in-this-matter. — Take especial notice of all the frequent phrases with quite; they are all written very conveniently and rapidly. Observe also the contraction for 2^>'0ve. (41) He-is too quiet a man to-care much for sports. (42) It took a good-deal (of) effort to-accomplish our end ; but our endeavors were-not futile. — Note the common i>hrase good-deed, showing the contraction of good joined to that of deal, in which the "ee" sound is shown by the high position of I. As shown by a good deal, our language contains some frequent combinations of words ; these combinations are in a measure compound words, although they may not be written together nor be connected by hyphens. Of this class, another is the phrase a great deal, formed in the saiue manner as a good deal : (43) A good-deal can be gained by answering-this letter at-once and explaining-the-case in-an agreeable manner. — Compare good-deal and agreeable (where the I is shaded). A similar group is a great many. As the initial m makes the outline rather lengthy, and as the small consonant n is very convenient to trace, rn is dropped in such groups as a great-many (44), too-many (4.5), to-many {A&)—to any would be medium t (for to) and the any stroke phrased ; how-many is consequently written by joining how and ny. This preference for the small letter is shown also in phrases such as how-long (48), where the larger consonant is dropped : (48) How-long-have-you-been in-the-employ of-this concern? — Xote the brief outline for how-long have-you-been. (48a) I-have-been- their employee for-many years ; about 12, or-something-like-that. — Note the word employee, where the final ee stroke could not very well be used ; it is there- fore replaced by the alphabetical character for /, in accordance with the rule that the alphabetical vowel-signs nmst be employed when symbolical vowel-representation is incon- venient. Observe that years, though below the line, stands high in relation to for-many. Note also the frequent phra.se or-something-like-that, where both like and that are contracted. (49) If-that-is-(the)-case, I-think-you-will-have to-get-used to-the change.— Note the common phrases if-thaf-is-the-case, I-think-you-ivill-have, and to-get-used (in the latter, get — being phrased— is contracted). (50) Was-there any clause in-his will, which disposed of-his real estate to-his cousin, so-far-(as)-you-know?" asked-the judge.— The sign for will, which has heretofore been treated entirely as a logogram, is seen to be the regular contraction of the word ; you will notice that this is the case with the majority of the logograms. The rules on contractions explain why the logogram for had stands above the line and is shaded, why such logograms as could, would, and should stand below the line, etc. lical estate is also a " compound-word" phrase ; the two words may be written conveniently in one outline. Note also the final contraction in the word judge, where J is placed low, the preceding vowel-stroke indicating the short " u" preceding the consonant. Observe the group so-far-as-you-know. (51) Can-you-tell-us what-was-done Mith-reference to-the dissolution (of the) firiu? — Note the convenient phrase tvhatwas-done. In the familiar group with-reference, the unaccented syllables (erence) are dropped. (51r0 I-cannot state the matter to-advantage, as-I-was absent-from-this-city about-that- time. — In to-advantage, Ave proceed as in with-reference, and drop the unaccented part tage. The outline could not be mistaken for advance, as the cnee stroke would there be used 94 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. instead of n. We have seen before that the prefix may sometimes stand for the whole word : In I-ivas ab from the city, ab can mean notliing but absent. The prefix ab can be used in a similar manner, in such stereotyped phrases as absolutely positive, absolutely sure, etc. (52) I-venture-(to)-say tliat it-is absolutely-necessary to j)reserve unity among-us, and- that-the victory of-our cause can only be achieved in-this-manner ; that-that will-be-the case, and-that-that can-be accomplished, is absolutely certain. — In this sentence, ab cannot read anything but absolutely. In venture, in the phrase I-venture-{to)-say, shr is dropjied (in analogy to advantage), as it is slighted by the voice. The same reasoning applies to accomplish; accompl can hardly read anything else. Observe the substitution of "oo" for "yu," in unity. Further note the groups and-that-the (where the outline for that-the stands in the and position), that-that, and and-that-that (where the phrase that-that stands in the and position). A safe and convenient method of writing phrases consisting of two words which form, to a certain degree, a compound word, is, to write the first syllable of the first word, and the last syllable of the last: thus, for return mail, we write retmail in one outline; since the second word has only one syllable, the whole syllable must be written. It is hardly neces- sary to say that this shortening device can be applied to very familiar phrases only. One of these phrases — which is of very frequent occurrence in commercial correspondence — is, at your early convenience (54), where at and your may be omitted, since they form an integral part of the phrase. Note particularly how this phrase is distinguished from at your earliest- convenience (53«) ; the former outline reads literally earl-ience, the latter, carliest-ience. (53) If-you-cannot give us-an answer by return-mail, please do-so at-your-earliest-con- venience, A compound word of very frequent occurrence is furthermore (55). We have seen in a preceding lesson — in the case of some body else, for instance — that a word may by position indicate the vowel-sound of an omitted word ; this rule applies to the case o^ furtherm,ore, where the low accented vowel of the (omitted) first syllable is indicated by the low position of the last syllable more. (56) We-sent a letter to-the freight claim agent about-the missing goods ; furthermore, we-sent tracers in-all-directions. — Note the phrase in-all-directions. (57) The doctor thinks that-he-can cure-the child, if-you-will-take-care that-he-gets the right-kind (of) food. — Note the contraction for cure, and that for /oofZ. Since take is con- tracted to a lengthened k, and since double consonants are not written, lengthened k joined with r will form the outline for take-care. This cannot be confused with taker, in which outline k and /• would be blended. Observe also the frequent group right-kind (of). (58) At-what rate (of) speed can-you-take-down dictation? — The common plirase, at what rate, will readily direct the thoughts of the reader so that tlie outline eed is easily read speed. Note the group can-you-take-down ; can is crossed with the contracted outline for take, which latter is phrased with the contracted outline for down. Such phrasing of con- tractions can be done only with familiar phrases. (58a) I-cannot-say ; I-never tried to write fast. (59) How-long did-the strike last? — Note the contraction for strike. (59a) It-was-soon settled bj^-the-committee. — See how the " oo" sound is shown by slanting lengthened n downward in it-was-soon. Also observe how the initial part of com, in by-the-committee, is formed by the initial part of the phrase. (60) It-seems-(to)-me that-this blind beggar is-a fraud.— Note the group it-seem,s-(to)-tne. Likewise, the contraction for fraud. (61) I found this freak (of) nature in-the cave, and I pride-myself very-much on-the scientific value-of-the discovery of-this weird creature.— This sentence offers some very perti- nent illustrations. Eek nature is very plain. If myself can be added to pride when the latter is written in full, it can also be added to the contraction, which is the whole word, with the exception of initial pr. Note the convenient outline for scientific, obtained bj' omitting tif. As rd, in low position, stands for word, in high position, it will stand for weird. (62) Did-you-see the Prince (of) Wales in London? — Note the contraction for pi-ince. (63) An ounce (of) prevention is wortli a pound of cure. (64) The detective admitted that-the-case is shrouded in deep mystery. — Observe how t is omitted in detective. The construction of the sentence implies the past participle so Lesson 14. '^ vA '^ /t, ? t^^/^/-^. \~^/^,^.^ ''/^^^^- - ^% <^ 7 8 T- - ^--^^ „^_^/. . -K^,. „^-^^_, „-y^-^^..^g/"x9 ^ -,.^ ^^ "rx^ r-^ '-^^ '' ... ^ -f-/.. -^ //, r Jff. ^yf.'\. r^-y ■-& J_£L , --/ -7 <^ ^^ _^-I:l^-^,^9-<- ^^ ^ - .^ ^// -^>>^ "" ■ ^_:e_j.r._^.AiU.-£-^ >. / -7 '^ ^/^^-g — ^-iL^ — ,^9_<- ^^,"y^/ "' — - '^i^^vj'^^?-'^- ' - -"-^ / '^^'^ ^ '^'^ -^/^///LaArl n .^J-Z^^r-..^-^^ '^.m'^^^ ^yr^J. l<.,a,^^ y^. .oo f' 96 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. clearly that, instead of shrouded, it is sufficient to write shroud, which is subject to final contraction. See how d, placed low and shaded, is preceded by the vowel-stroke, showing that the contraction is the end of a word. Note also the convenient outline for ')nystery, spelled mystri/, where medium str is employed to advantage. (65) Those- who toil shall reap the harvest, but-the lazj' ones must starve. — Note how clear the final contraction oil is for foil ; observe how ns, for ones, is written under the final y stroke of lazy ; note further the final contraction arv {r shaded), for starve. In writing words which may be contracted, the student should carefully consider the i-ules in this respect. In this manner, the habit of contracting instinctively, yet correetlj', will soon be acquired. When a word is equally adapted to initial and final contraction, preference is given to the former. Having once decided upon a contraction for a given word, the same contraction should always be used for the same word. In the following Writixg Exercises, the asterisks (*) indicate that the words by which they stand are to be contracted : an asterisk at the beginning indicates an initial contraction ; at the end, a final contraction : — (A) Chicago, 111., September 15, 1898. Messrs. Sibley, Ward & Co., St. Louis, Mo. Gentlemen :— The assortment^ of domestic fancy^ goods *pick(ed) out^ by our Mr. Hellinger has been received. We-are very proud of the spick* and sjian appearance of the lot, and believe that-they-will-make quite* a hit*. However, we *find-the price* a little* high, a feature** which-will interfere to-a large extent with-the sale. If-you-could raake-us some conces- sions, we-could offer them at such figures as would stir* up the *trade. This would also spoil* the chances of-our rivals to-get ahead of us, and would put* us both in the front** rank as-the leading dealers in-this-*kind (of) *goods. As-the field* is comparatively new, and very profitable, we feel* that-it-is worth*-while* to-*give this style* of *goods our special attention ; and if we join* forces, considerable advantage must accrue therefrom^ for both- (of )-us. We therefore *ho]>e-you-will-take this-matter up Avithout delay. Yours verj' truly. The Biddle Dry Goods Co. (B) Columbia, S. C, November 19, 1898. The Haines Optical' Co., Philadelphia, Pa. Gentlemen : — On-what terms* could-you*-furnish-me with 5 3^i-inch prisms, such as-I-saw exhibited on-the 3d floor* of your store*, at my *last visit to-your-city?* As-to-the patterns of frames which j'our salesman show(ed) me, I must admit that at any other-time the prices* would tempt* me to buy ; but just-at-present, business is rather dull* with us, and I-do-not wish to-make *matters worse* by increasing my stock*," which- is (a) *good-deal* heavier than-I-should-like to-see. I ^?'M.s^you-will-give this communication })rom2)t attention, and *let-me-know at-once about the prisms*.ii ^ Yours very truly, Fred. M. Johnson. (C) Yonkers, N. Y., December 2, 1898. Mrs. Sarah Brimley, City. My-dear-Madam : — Knowing that-you-are quite* fond* of-the little unfortunate orphans,!^ and-that you-have-their welfare at-*heart, I-take-the liberty of directing your attention to-the Christmas Fund*, which-we-are try(ing) to swell to larger proportions. If we-can raise about $200'-' *more, we-can *give the little-ones (piite* a feast*. Wlth-that-end in-view, a fair will-be-*held at-the asylum, and-the older pupils will perform a one act farce* before-the *friends of-the institution. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 97 I-think I-*need not plead* at-length with-you in behalf of our wards, as-I-know that- your purse* is-always at-tlie disposal (of) Charity, and as-there-is-no field* iu-which assist- ance can-be *inore welcome just-now. If-you *wish to-donate any articles for-the fair, *please fix* a time when our wagon can call for-them ; if-you *wish to-send-a *check, *please make it out to-tiie-order of John Stewart. The older boys are going to print* the program for-the affair; if-you-can turn* any adver- tisements our way, they-will-be very-much appreciated. Thank(ing)-you-in-advance" for whatever favors you-may-be-able to-show-us, I-remain Yours sincerely, (Mrs.) T. Brooks. {D) Utica, X. Y., July 18, 1898. Messrs. Carringtox & Hutchinson, Rochester, N. Y. Gentlemen : — Mr. F. R. Hearst, the witness for-the prosecution, *called at our office to-day, and made the following statement : — My occupation is farming.'* On-the evening of-the 15th of *last month, I-was sit(ting)* on the *back porch* of-my *house, and was* sm()k(ing) a *pipe. Suddenly I-heard a sus- picious *sound com(ing) from-the *barn which adjoins the stable. Then I-heard-the *noise of a horse's *hoofs. I shoutfed)* " Who's there ?" but received no answer. Then I-*went to- the *barn, and found* that somebody had broken"* into-the stable and stolen* my *black mare from-the stall*.'" I-call(ed) my neighbor at-once, and we set-out'^ to-*catch the *thief ; but, as-he-had a *good start*, and as-the mare is-a very *fast *horse'', we-had-no *chance to- overtake him. The above was duly™ *sworn to before-us, and we-*hope that it-will-enable-you to-go ahead with-this-case. ■ Yours respectfully, Francis J. Henderson & Son. {E) Fresno, Cal., October 4, 1898. Mr. Earl'' Stewart, Oakland, Cal. My-dear young* *Friend: — I-take*-pleasure in inform(ing)-you that-at''-- the recent competition of essays the palm* 2^ (of) victory was awarded to-you. Your work was found* so excellent that, as-a *mark^* (of) distinction, it- will-be printed* and preserv(ed) in-the library of-our institution. I *trust that-these lines will-be an encouragement to-j^ou, and will spur*-j'ou on in-your efforts always to-do your best. However, I-hope-they-will-not fill-you with pride* or con- ceit, which-have spoil(ed)* many a *smart young*-*man. You-will no-*doubt be inclined to talk* much of-your success ; but-I-should advise-you to endeavor to *curb this tendency to self-glorification. True^* pride* is-the delight we-take in doing our *work honestly and efficiently,'" and in enter(ing) into-the task we-have set-ourselves with *heart and soul, without wast(ing) our energy in mere* words*. I-have-no-*doubt that-you-will-be a credit to-your community and to-your family, just- (as)-you-will-always-be a credit to-the institution where-you-(have)-been *trained. I-wish- you" success in-all you-may under(take). May your career be as promising (as) your work was at college. Yours very sincerely, John Watson Clifford. {F) Baltimore, Md., April 19, 1898. Messrs. Haggard & Sons, Wilmington, Del. Gentlemen : — We learn from newspapers and *trade reports that-the peach* crop in your State has suffered considerably, owing to-the recent unexpected frosts* ; and-the papers say that- this-was-the worst* spell in fifteen years*. Will-you please *give-us a statement of-the damage that-was-done in-your section ? 7 98 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. We-should also be-pleased to-have-your opiuiou as-to-\vhat effect this weather will-have upon-the future delivery of contracts. Can-you-sell-us a-few hundred baskets of choice* fruit*, to be shipped*^^ early in August? We-would-be willing to pay 60 cents for-them, delivered at our store*. Yours very truly, L. PiNKERT & BrO. Anxotations. — ^ In assortment, the ?' following o maj^ be omitted. ^ In fancy, the substitution of e for a will enable us to write the convenient outline /enc^. ^ The out dot should be placed right under k (which stands in high position). * If preach is contracted by ch preceded by the vowel-stroke, preacher, feature, etc., will be contracted in the same manner, except that, instead of writing simply ch, we blend it with r. * Front sounds like frunt. * In order to join there and from, the latter should be written downward. ' Since k va&y be omitted from the final syllable, cal, optl will form a very convenient outline. ^ Cross k (placed low) with /. ^ Blend r and s. ^^ O has the a sound in stock. ^^ Prisms, being a technical word, should not be contracted when it occurs only once ; when such "words are repeated, however, thej^ may well be shortened. ^^ i? may be omitted. ^^ About §200 may be written on the same principle as about it, viz.: by bringing the a stroke of about above the figure 3, and omitting the out dot. '* Cross nk (of thank) with the initial stroke of in, and join the final stroke of the latter to advance. ^^ Farming could be contracted, if it did not occur at the beginning of a paragraph, the drift of which is unknown to the reader. ^^ Very little would be gained in outline, if broke should be contracted. ^" In stole and stall, however, the saving is considerable. '^The out dot need not be written under the line, but under the end of t. ^'■' The drift of the paragraph is now so well developed, that fa ho will not be taken for anything hut fast horse. ^^ See Lesson 12, (156). "It will be seen from Lesson 8, that the syllable itr can be written in two ways : by the ur sign, or by r, pi-e- ceded by the initial vowel-stroke placed low. This lesson has shown how conveniently the ur sign can be used in final contraction ; for initial purposes, the second method is prefer- able. ^ Bring out well the a stroke (for at) in that-at-the. ^^ M, by means of its initial and final strokes, offers an excellent opportunity for showing (by adding the vowel-stroke) whether the vowel-sound precedes or follows the consonant. In palm, the initial stroke should be plainly shown (though it should not be made too long) ; the high jjosition above the line indicates the end of the word, and the shading indicates the "a" sound (so that no "i" sound can be implied here). ^* Compare mark, which is an initial contraction, with palm, a final contraction. Mark is represented also by m above the line and shaded for the "a" sound (as in mar), but the vowel-stroke at the end of m indicates that the vowel-sound follows the consonant ; this vowel-stroke should be sliown plainly. ^' True is a logogram ; if it were not, true and j)ride could not be contracted simultaneouslj'. -^In efficiently, double / can be used advantageously to regain the writing line. Enf, being unaccented, may be dropped. " Wish is contracted by w in high position ; to this the u sign may be added, on the same principle as in would-you. ^* Place pt, blended, above the line. GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 99 Lesson No. 15. This lesson (which contains practically nothing new) will furnish reading material illustrative of the methods of contraction and of the other shortening devices presented in the preceding lessons. The Frog Farm. (1") A new industry has been created through feminine ingenuity and enterprise. (2) Miss Fitch was forced by ill-health to-give-up her position. (3) While busy with plans as- to-her future occupation, she-happened to-go into-a market, where she-saw frog legs offered- for-sale at-a rather high price. (4) A fortunate idea occurred to-her then : (5) If-this article brings such good prices, why not raise frogs? (6) She-found, upon investigation, that-a nearby district was full-of marshes and small ponds, which-were filled with frogs during spring and summer. (7) The land was-not thought worth very-much, and-the owner was consider (ably) surprised at-her offer (of) $1.2-5 an acre. (8) He- was only too-glad to-get rid (of) 25 acres of swamp, which-were soon measured oft" and transferred to-Miss Fitch, who at-ouce set to-work to-fence-in her new-possessions with barbed wire. (9) When-the farmers learned of-her intentions, they shook their heads, and cracked jokes about-their new- neighbor ; some even ventured-to-say that-they doubt(ed) as-to-whether-or-not the "School Ma'am" was of sound mind, while-others looked at-her with-a kind but pitying glance (of) sympathy. (10) However, she-did-not pay much attention to-the-comments (of the) village folks, and went about-her business. (11) As it-was too-late in-the season when-she-was-done with-the work of fencing-in her property, she-spent the winter in reading all-the books she-could-get that treated of frogs ; and when-she- was-not reading, she-spent-her time in-a barn, practising with-a target rifle. (12) She-was-so persevering that-she-could soon hit anything she aimed at. (13) When spring came, and-the frog season opened, she-went out on-her grounds and shot frogs, wnich-she shipped to-the city. (14) Slie-could-not supply all-the-orders she-had, and when-the season was-over, she found that-she-had clear(ed) from her "farm" some- thing-like $1500 for-the first year's "crop." (15) Now it-was-her turn to-laugh. (16) The next year there-was-no-need for-her to-do any shooting. (17) Those-who-had made-fun of- her shot frogs and sold them to-her, while-she shipped them to-the-market at-a nice profit, (18) At-the-present-time her income is about §5000 (a) year ; she employs several clerk(s), and has quite a large business. Annotations.— (3) Note the final contraction for frog. Observe also how at-a is phrased : if this stroke is made with a slight slant upward, while the ordinary dash is made with a slight slant downward, the two strokes will never clash. Note the group offered-jor- sale, where the unaccented part of offered is dropped, and the remainder of the word is blended with for-sale. (4) Substitution of e for the u results in a very convenient outline for fortunate, written foi'chenat. (6) See how well near and by can be phrased, and how nicely the blending principle can be applied to the group disfr (of district). Note r omitted in marshes, and observe the final contraction for pond, where o has the "a" sound. In "during ing and summer'' the missing spr will at once be supplied by the mind to the outline ing. (7) Note the added y stroke in considerably, where the first ending is omitted, as usual. (8) The phrase too-glad, where glad is contracted, shows the wisdom of retaining the full size of the medium t, when the latter is used for too. Thus we know at once that the contraction phrased with it must be an adjective. If t in this case were shortened as in the following outline {to-get), we would know at once that gla would stand for a verb or a pronoun. Note the group set-to-work, where set and work are contracted initially. The mentioning of the " fencing in" process at once suggests the barbed wire, so that both these 100 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. words may be contracted in this case. It will be observed that barbed is considered a monosyllable, the ending ed being omitted in shorthand. (9) The word crack{Qd) readily suggests jokes. Observe about their, in which is applied the principle already used in about it. Observe the group ivhUe-others, where th of others is placed lower than the preceding I, thus clearly showing the short " u" sound. (11) Ij can be blended nicely with t in the phrase too-late. In this sentence you might be tempted to phrase in and her, which would not be correct, as they do not belong together in sense; in is rather a part of the word fence. Note the convenient outline obtained by omitting t from j^^'operty (which actually reads propry). The ending is dropped from '''eading, admitting of initial contraction. (12) Observe the phrase that -she-could. The word soon might also be phrased here ; but this would endanger the legibility of the outline. (13) The final contraction may safely be employed for spring, since the outline will scarcely be read for thing in this connection. Note also the final contraction pt for shipped (shipt). O has the "a" sound in shot, which is, therefore, well represented by t shaded and above the line, showing that it is the end of the word, — that is, it is the (shaded) consonant following the "a" sound of the contracted word. (14) Observe / placed high and shaded, showing well the "a" sound in farm; this initial contraction is more convenient than the final rm (/• shaded) above the line. (lb) Note the frequent group there-was-no. The ending is dropped from shooting, and the word is contracted finally. (17) Note the phrase made-fun. (18) Observe the initial contraction for clerks, which actually reads clu, since er has the short ur sound in this word. As the preceding word several implies the plural, the latter need not be indicated further. There are a few words which are composed of two syllables, but which are pronounced almost like monosyllables, particularly in rapid speaking. There is very little diflference between the sound of /lour and /lower, for example. These words may, therefore, be con- tracted like monosyllables ; and as the final consonant — besides being smaller than the initial — affords a good opportunity to show the vowel-sound, such words are subject to final contraction. For this reason r shaded and below the line (reading otir) may stand as the contraction for tower, bower, shower, power, etc. How safe and suggestive these contrac- tions are is shown by the examples. (19) She wore a flower in her hair. — Here the contraction could hardly be anything but flower. Note also the initial i stroke for in, admitting of the phrase in-her. (20) Our City Hall tower is the tallest in the world. — This sentence shows again how unmistakable these contractions are. The first one will hardly be taken for anything but our, nor the second for anything but tower. (21) The skies are clouded ; I-am afraid we-shall-have a shower.— ^^ placed low {I shaded) could not stand for cloudy, and must, therefore, read clouded. In exclamations, such as ah (22), oh (23), etc., it is wise to add h to the vowel, so that the a dot may not be read for ab, or the o for of. No h is necessary in such unmistakable exclamations as pshaw (24). COLLOQUIALS are formed in a logical manner, utilizing the various logograms and phrasing the words, thus obtaining very convenient outlines. The examples are self-explanatory. Didn' t-you-know (25) : didnH-you (26) : couldnH-he (27) : ivasnH-he (28) : shouldnH-he (29) : couldn' t-he-{have)-been (30), — if we wish to write couldn' t-have-been, h would be omitted: cou.khi' t-she-{have)-been (31): arenH-they (32): wonH-they (33): wonH-you (34): isnH-she (35) : wasnH-sIie-there (36) : they-shan't (37) : it-isn''t (38) : it-ainH (39) : it-shouldn' t-be (40) : it-canH-be (41) : it-tvasnH-{to)-be (42) : it-ivasnH-so (43) : fhis-ivasnH-the-case (44) : werenH- they (45) ; werenH-you (46) : donH-you (47) : donH-they (48) : doesnH-she (49) : doesnH-he (50), — compare the latter with donH-they (48), where the o must be clearly shown. In doesn't, however, n is simply added to d, which stands for do as well as for does. The following Reading Exercise will embody additional examples of colloquial forms. Lesson 15 ■^/ - ^J ^ j'^ z z /^ t^^ ^ ? , ^O" tJ^T"-'^^ # 7 -^^--/- ./^ -^v /'i^^^^-^ M ^ - ^S^^.^e. ^ l:^-^ •r'. /^ ? ^ -9- ■^ ^ ^ _C-vf> _^=_ '^' s ^*ei_ — ^^ / --^ y^C-^ . -^-c>^ "O' /■P if XoO c / ^:---^-^^ 0.- "^^-> 9^ - - ^^ j> 9 rp. ^ o^(f\y^ ^ iL^_/^^^l^J>^_ ///7/,/ '^ 6r ^>^ # ^X ^n L -^ A ^ < 9 b^ \J C 02/'^ ^ ^^g^ ^="^7- ^y >. g. -TT^ ■ . (^ /- z^^ << /?/ r^/ .^ . ^ /^?— ^^ r^ .^^cjU^.^^ /^^ Jot. -cf=- _=: /" g^^^-TTO L- ^^ ^ :^ ..(^i^ ^/ _^ ^,^9^ A-^ -, S7 ?... ^-^c^/-^ / V-^^ r.^ f- X/,. 7^- ^ y 2 ^^ g , -- ^■. ^y -^,^^ . y^^v^^ , •e/^^^./ 102 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. (51) Doctor John F. Fleming, Superintendent County Hospital, (52) Youngstown, O. (53) Dear Sir :— I-(am)-sorry that-I-am-compelled to-notify-you that-the trustees aren't satisfied witli-the-present state (of) things iu-tlie woman's branch of-tlie asylum. (54) If-the matron was too-sicl£ to-look after-the inmates, why-didn't-she let-us-know. If-she- wasn't sick, why- wasn't-she at-her post? (55) Won't-you tell-her that if-she-thinks she needn't- be-there at niglit she-ought (to) bear-in-mind that-she-may-be punished severe(ly) ? (56) Won't-you be-good-enough to-see that in future I-shan't-have occasion to-send-you such a communica- tion as-this? Yours very-truly, Donald G. Roberts. Annotations. — (51) In this connection super will readily be taken for superintendent. Observe the convenient outline for hospital (where o has the "a" sound), obtained through the omission of the syllable it (52) Observe how clearly the identity of the s is preserved in Youngstoivn ; if the circle were brought close to the ng stroke, it would be a tli. The outline shows the following t connected with the s looji thrown backward, as is done when it is blended finally with signs ending with a right-hand curve. Note shaded n placed low — that is, traced in a downward direction — in relation to t. (53) Am is an integral part of the phrase I-am-sorry, and may, therefore, be omitted. (54) Note the phrases ivhy-dichi' t-she and xoliy-wasnH-she. It may, perhaps, be thought that these combinations of letters are not very clear ; this is not the case, however ; for example, looking at the last phrase, we find that the outline reads literally tvhy-wantsh ; this has no meaning, while xvhy-ioasnH-she fits very nicely into the sense of the sentence. (55) Note the phrase tell-her^ actually reading teller^ as it sounds in colloquial speech. Note also the phrase needn'' t-he-therc, where need is contracted initially. Bear, in the phrase bear-in-mind, is also contracted initially. In severely ly is superfluous, since it must be implied, — the unaccented first e may be omitted, and s and v may be blended. (56) Note the phrase as-this. In the signature, notice the shorthand g {j would be wrong in this case) ; b and r are blended in Boberts ; observe also the shading, since o has the "a" sound in this word. (57) When I-asked-the witness whether he hadn't-seen-the man before, he-said that-he wouldn't-be sure about it. (58) I-then asked him why he-couldn't-be positive about it ; to- which-he replied that if he-hadn't-known that-the-place was considered safe, he would (have) kept a sharp outlook. (59) Under-the circumstances, I-don't-think he-is to blame- for-the theft and shouldn't-be-held liable for it. Annotations. — (58) Note k placed low in the phrase he-couldnH-be. (59) Since held is phrased, it may safely be contracted initially ; to be he liable is very safe and suggestive. Writing Exercises. Growing Beyond. (By Oliver Wendell Holmes.) I *find-the great thing in-this world is-not so-much where-we *stand as in-what-direc- tion we-are *mov(ing). To *reach the port* of heaven, we-must^ sail sometimes with-the *wind^ and sometimes against it, — but we-must sail, and not *drift nor lie at anchor. There- is-one very *sad thing in old friendships, to every *mind that-is reallj^ mov(ing) onward. It-is-this : that-one cannot *help* using his early friends as-the seaman uses the log to-*mark* his progress. Every now and then we throw an old schoolmate over-the stern with-a string of thought ti(ed) to-him, and look — I-am afraid with-a kind (of) luxurious and sanctimonious compassion— to-see-the rate at which-the string*^ ^reels' off, while he lies there bobbing up and down, poor fellow: and we-are dashing along with-the white foam and bright* sparkle at our bows ; the ruffles of prosperity and progi-ess, with-a sprig (of) diamond stuck** in it : but this is only the sentimental *side (of the) *matter ; for grow we-must, if we outgrow ail-that we love. Annotations.— * i2 maybe omitted from port. ^S (standing for must) should not be phrased with the following s of sail ; for, in that case, one s would have to be suppressed, GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 103 and the identity of the logogram would be lost. If the following word were commenced with any other letter, — as in we-must-know, for example,— m?endent or independence; the context will readily determine which is meant. As shown by the two outlines, either the regular in sign or the initial * stroke can be used in these words. The syllable feet also illustrates the above rule : it cannot be contracted unless it is preceded by a prefix. Compare affect (72), cffection (73), and effect (74) ; here the double consonant may be written, as the hand must make the stroke in order to regain the writing- line. When the second stroke is not made by the return of the hand to the writing-line, — that is, when the next syllable starts below the line, as in effectual (75), — double / need not be written. Note the common phrase to-that-effect (76). Infect {11) should show the prefix in cleax'ly. From the prefix pter, r may be omitted, as in perfect (78) ; note also perfection (79), obtained by adding n to tlie former outline; see also imperfection (80), perfectly (81) and perfecting (82). Another illustration is furnished by the syllable Jee< ; abject (83) : object (84) : objection (85) : objectionable (86) : inject (87) : pii'oject (88) : projecting (89) : projector (90) : projectile (91). Note the examples of tend; attend (92)— which compare with attempt (93)— where final contraction is employed : intend or intent (94) : attentive (95) : retention (96) : content (97). Examples with the medial " o" sound are furnished by the syWable form (98) ; reform (99) : reformer (100) : inform (101) : conform (102)— showing that/o may be traced downward as well as upward : co7iformitg {103) : transform (104) — here it is more convenient to separate the two syllables: j^^^form (105): performance (106): formation (107): mUform (108): misinform (109) : uniforvi (110)— note how the little cross-stroke (for uni) stands close to the beginning of /o, showing that the former is to be pronounced first ; in the phrase form-you, where fo is traced upward, the crossing would be effected near the centre-line, — that is, near the end of the outline, — since the cross-stroke is made last. Illustrations with short " u" are furnislied by the syllable duct ; the latter is contracted by writing d in low jiosition, showing tlie vowel-stroke following. Thus we derive conduct (111), where con is reversed, and its second half is sliorteiied a little to admit of convenient joining with d: conductor (112) : 2^>'oduct (113) : productive (114) : production {lib) : reduc- tion (116) : inductive (117) : abduct (118). 106 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. A case of medial "oo" is furnished by prove; approve (119) : approval (120): disap- prove (121) — note how the "a" is clearly brought out; compare the outline with disprove (122). Note also irnj^rovement (123), niisimx)rove (124), reprove (12-5), reproviny (126), and irreprovahle (127). As some of these examples show, when no ambiguity can arise, and when it is con- venient, prefixes may also be joined to final contractions. In this respect the tendency of the beginner will be the same as in regard to the use of the vowel-stroke in contractions where it is not ne(;essary : in the beginning he will be inclined to disconnect the prefix from the final contraction ; but, as his practice increases, he will gradually and unconscioush- connect the two outlines, when it is safe to do so. Take the case of disprove^ for example : when prefix and contraction are joined, the outline reads dis-oove. The same usage applies to 'inisprove (= mis-oove) ; if mis Avere carelessly written, the outline might read move ; but even then there is no danger of confusion, since move is subject to initial contraction. Note the group with the basic syllable verse or vert ; advert (128) — notice the low position and the vowel-stroke preceding d (for the initial a) ; also, the stroke following d in low position, to indicate the short sound of vert.* Compare avert (129) with advert. See how the d loop is extended in divert (130) ; further words of this group are invert (131), obvert (132), revert (133), subvert (134), pervert (135), and convert (136). All the usual devices can be employed to show the vowel-sounds. We knoAv that in words like limit, for example, m may be extended above the top-centre-line to show the " i" sound. This can also be done in the basic syllable mit, as in permit (137), transm,it (138), remit (139), commit (140), omit (141), and submit (142). As shown by these examples, in Words with Prefixes, the prefix (or prefixes) is written as usual, while the rest of the word is contracted according to the rules which would govern it, if it occurx'ed without the prefix, extending these rules to all monosyllables, M-hether or not they are contracted when they occur as independent words. In arrive (143), for example, the prefix can be joined to the contraction for rive ; adding I to this contraction, we obtain arrival (144). Note around (145) ; here the vowel- stroke following r is not necessary, as there is no word that could read a-our, and if the outline were meant for our alone, the preceding a stroke would not be used. Compare aside (146) with astride (147), where final contraction is used ; see how well the vowel-sounds are shown bj^ means of final contraction in assure (148) and acquit (149). In ctbuse (150), "oo" is substituted for "u" ("yu"). Compare absent (151) with absurd (152). See how the " i" sound is shown in abridge (153). Words with prefix admit of retaining the line, which is an advantage in speedy writing. Mire is subject to final contraction ; joining to the latter the a dot (for ad), we obtain admire (154), where only m is omitted. In adjoin (155) the a dot is joined to the final contraction placed low ; the same applies to adjudge (156) — prefix and final contraction, which compare with adjust (157) — prefix and initial contraction. No a dot is used in addict (158), address (159), and advance (160), as none would be used in the full outlines. If leave is contracted by omitting the final v, believe (161) will be written by adding the prefix be to the contraction ; the outline might also read belief, but the context will readily decide the proper meaning. See also behalf (162), befriend (163), bedeck (164), behave (165), behavior (166). Compare begin (167), began (168), and begun (169). Note the final contrac- tion in bestir (170). As shown by the prefixes illustrated thus far, they may leave their places in order to admit of convenient joining with the rest of the outline, just as in the ease of the logograms. The vowel in i^aet can be shown by shading jj, which applies also to compact [IIW. Observe combat {Vi'2)—mb blended. See how the r blended with m is shown in com,rade (173). Note the contraction for compress (174), which cannot stand for comprise, as pr would be shortened a little in the latter outline, in consideration of the i stroke. Prefix with final contraction is shown by comjyile (175), comiyound (176), and compete or complete (177). Con can be turned around as usual ; condemn or condeiise (178), from which is formed con- demnation or condensation (179) : confess (180) : connee^(181) : connection (182) : concern (183) — * Even if this stroke were made carelessly, and its low position therefore not plainly apparent, there would be no danger of a clash, as the "er" sound (as in dare) may be substituted for the "ur" sound (as in verse). GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 107 here the " ur" sound is replaced by the " er" sound: congest (184), which compare with object (84) : conscience (185) : conscientious (186) : contact (187) : convex or convent (188) — the ay stroke must be written in convey : confide (189). See how the "yu" sound is shown in confuse (190) and confute (191). When words witli the "yu" sound are phrased, the final consonant may be dropped, and the crossing may be effected by means of the initial conso- nant of the following outline, as shown by the groups confuse-the or confute-the (192). (193) may read confusion or confusion. Note con and final contraction in contempt (194) and confer (195) ; compare the latter with confirm (196). Compare commend (197) with command (198), and the latter with countermand (199), which is well distinguished from countermarch (200), where the consonant showing the "a" sound, as in march, must be placed high. Compare command and demand (201), debar (202) and debark (203). Note degrade (204) and degradation (205), which latter compare with digression (206). D in the prefixes de and dis blends conveniently with the large letters, and since in this way a large part of the word is written briefly, these contractions are particularly safe and valuable : in depart (207), the blended group dp must stand high, and p must be shaded to show the "a" sound of 0/ adding to this an m, we have department (208), which compare with deportment (209), where dp is in normal position. As shown by these examples, when the initial letter of a syllable ordinarily subject to final contraction admits of blending it with the prefix, initial contraction is preferable. Such words as deter and defer are just as easily written in full, as the ur sign blends well with t or /*. See how the d loop is blended with sp in despair (210). In despond (211), where d and sp are likewise blended, the group must be placed high, and sp must be shaded to show the " a" sound of o. In discharge (212) ch must also be shaded and placed high. While p must be shaded in dispatch (213), no high position is required ; compare this outline with depart. Compare also debark (203) and disband (214). Note also discount (215), disclose (216), and disgrace (217). Compare displace (218) and dis- please (219). The words most frequently found with the prefix de are desire (220) and decide (221) ; these outlines may be considerably shortened by the principle of substitution : since these words sound like disire and diside, the i^refix dis can be conveniently used, writing desire in this form in full, and omitting final d in decide. When phrased, desire may also be shortened by dropping /•. In prefixes witli e, the initial vowel must be plainly shown by the " ay" stroke ; engage (222) — here the ng sign cannot be employed, for n and g are not blended by the voice. Note also engraft (223) and enchant (224). See how well e and s blend in estrange (225), which compare with estate (226) ; see how well the latter is distinguished from esteem (227), where the " ee" sound is shown by shading t at the bottom. Note how clearly initial e is shown in extreme (228), where the basic syllable is subject to final contraction, the outline reading actually ex-eme. Note also extent (229) and extension (230), exchange (231) and exhale (232). See how well the "ee" sound is shown in exceed (233), and the " ur" sound in expert (234) and emerge (235), where the ur sign can be blended with the initial letters of the basic syllables. Note also entertain (236) and enterprise (237). Compare forbear (238) and forbid (239) ; note foremost (240) and forgave (241), which compare with forgive (242). Compare impeach (243) with impede (244) ; in both cases prefix and final contraction may be joined without impairing the meaning of the words. This could not be said of all the examples given in the preceding paragrai^h : if we join / and b (the latter placed high) in forbid, for example, the outline will become fib ; and forgive would become fig. The prefix in can be replaced by the short initial ee stroke in many cases ; cai*e should be taken, however, that this does not impair the legibility : in that case, the regular / sign is preferable, although it is a little longer. Note instinct (245) or (245a), and compare instate (246) with estate (226). Observe initial contraction in inside (247), and finnl contraction in insure (248). Since it may be omitted from institute, and "yu" may be replaced by "oo," — so that the word becomes instoot, — the basic syllable is subject to final contraction, in con- nection with the prefix in, as shown in (249), from which we derive institution (250). Let us look at the examples with the prefix mis ; mismatch (251) : misdeed (252)— note how the "ee" sound is shown; compare this outline with inisdeal {25S), where the basic syllable is subject to final contraction, and which is actually mis-eal, compare the latter witli mislead (254). Note jnisfake (255) and mistcach (256). Observe the blending of jyiis and /• in m.isrule (257), admitting of a clear indication of the "oo" sound. Note also the final 108 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. contraction in misjudge (258) and tnistreat (259) — Avhich outline compare with tneat (260). Compare mischief (261), wliere chief is contracted finally on the same principle as ship, with misfit (262), where mis and / are blended. When ob — where b is omitted — cannot be convejiiently connected with the basic sj'l- lable (which is very rarely the case), care should be taken to write the two parts of the word close together, so that o, for ob, will not clash with of ; obtrude (263). In oblige (264) and obtuse (265) the two parts of the word are connected. Out, by the nature of its form, cannot be connected ; while its low position should always be clearly shown, it need not necessarily stand below the line, but it must stand below the beginning of the following character ; this is shown by outwit (266), oidspoken (267), outreach (268) ; compare outstare (269) with abstract (62), and note the difference in the position of the a dot. In outface (270) and outj^ost (271), the dot is in its regular position. Compare oidcast (272) and outcome (273) ; also outlive (274) and oidlast (275), oidbreak (276) and break out (277), outburst (278) and burst out (279). Examples with over are shown by overcharge (280)— note the vowel-stroke at the end of the outline ; overreach (281) and overhead (282), which compare with overhear (283). a is omitted from per, as usual; 2^6>'C€i*^6 (284) — note how the "ee" sound is shown clearly. It must be thoroughly comprehended that the omission of r does not apply to the initial syllable of such words as jnirchase, pturpose, etc., where the ur sign is used. For the prefix pre, the short or the regular sign may be used ; pretend or pretext (285) : prevent (286). Compare precede (287) and proceed (288) — note how the vowel-sounds are shown. Observe proceeds (289) and procedure (290). In progra'ms (291) s is added to the initial contraction of the basic syllable ^ram. Note prolong (292), propose (293), protect (294), and protection (295). Examples with re: rebound (296), which compare with rehut (297); while r may be joined to the contraction in the former word, it cannot be joined in the latter, as it would then become rub ; recall (298) : redeem (299) : redress (300) : regain (301) : regret (302) : relax (303) : remark (304) : relieve or re^ie/(305) — the context will readily distinguish between the two words : repair (306) : replace (307) : reward (308). Note the difference between retrieve (309) and relieve (305) ; see also rebuke (310), refund (311), refute (312), reverse (313), rejoice (314), repeat (315) — which compare with repeater (316) and requital (317). When the initial and final parts of a word are not connected, they shoitld be written closely together. Note how the vowel is shown in succeed (318). Compare the outline of substitute (319) — formed similarly to institute — with suit (320) ; see subjoin (321), subside (322), and submerge (323), and compare the latter with surmount (324). Note also surround (325). Since r is omitted from the prefix sur, in words like surprise, s and p are blended, as shown in a previous lesson. Note transshi]) (326), where the final contraction for shi}) is used, and can be conveniently blended ; also transpose (327), translate (328), and translator (329). Illustrations for under are furnished by undermine (330), undersell (331), and underbid (332). Words with un : imfair (333), tmfold (334), imdoubtedli/ (335)— note the initial vowel- stroke, unman (336), and unhitch (337). As shown by the latter word, the prefix un may safely be raised above the line for the sake of convenience. It cannot clash with in, as the latter is represented by the i sign or by the initial i stroke. Words with ?

^ Oo 30 i^ tf-c / ^->y-.^^ ^ 3S- VA V'O T ^ >'>/ V * / / .^:2_X X 3KO 3Z: ^ ^ o-/ - v ^ ^y^ ^ ^ - ^ ^ e^-i — y 3vjr ^ r^ -^v -^-i ^ ^ i ^ 'Cy yy^ 3C3 7 36 c^ ,-^^^.r>^ ^j ix_.£^_.^ 7^7 -?idly in-value, where- upon-the bank at-once demanded the return of-the money. (153) Although-the books of-the company show quite a large amount on-the sinking fund, they-were-not able to-meet-the obligation in-the-short-time which-the-bank granted, as-the collections on-their outstandings had-been very poor lately. (154) Eve n-tlie- fact that-their treasurer is-also-one-of-the stocks holders of-the Clearing House, could-nbt induce-the bank to-change its decision ; as-there- were rumors current that some-few-weeks ago, the company was compelled to-dishonor a draft for quite a large sum owing to-lack of funds. (155) The C. M. Co. claim, however, that-it-was owing to-a dispute about-a shipment which-they-say they-had-bought f. o. b., while-the shipper claims they-did-not. (156) The assets of-the Company by far exceed the liabilities, and if matters are-not rushed too-rauch, the creditors will-get 100 cents on-the dollar. (157) It-is only (a) question' (of )-time, when-the available property can-be realized ; and so-far-(as)-I-know, I-do-not-thinb that-you-will-lose a cent. (158) It-is-altogother probable that, with-the-good prospects which- have lately stimulated the market, it-might-be-well to-let-them resume business at-au early 116 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. date. (159) There-is-no-doubt that-if-they-could-make-the coutemplated improvements in- their machinery, as-they-were about to-do when-tlie unfortunate turn of matters interfered with-their plans, they-could very rapidly satisfy all claims against-them. Yours very truly, Robert B. Erbing. Annotations. — (150) In is omitted from examination, in analogy to communication. As is illustrated by the word celluloid, there are some few outlines in which it would be inconvenient to express the "oi" sound by placing the i stroke low; in cases of this sort, the general i^ractice is to substitute "i" for "oi." See how well the "ee" sound of assignee is shown. Look at the phrase to-supply ; since s starts with an upstroke, the medium t may be phrased with it, and s may be ti'aced in the direction in which it is most conveniently joined with the following p. (151) Note the phrase seenis-{to)-be, where seems is contracted. See how mp is placed low in company, where o has the short "u" sound. Company has been abbreviated to Co. in the succeeding sentences. Unaccented e is omitted from collateral, admitting of blending t and r. (152) See how where and upon are joined, the low position of n being indicated by its downward direction. (153) The out dot (in outstanding) is clearly' shown to be in low position, although it is not placed below the writing line. (154) Observe the outlines for even-the-fact and is-also-one-of-the. In stockholder, where both words are contracted, the ending er is added to the contraction for hold, to form the derivative [holder). See how r and ing are blended in the final contraction of clearing. The u is replaced in induce by " oo." Note also the phrase some-few-iveeks-ago. (155) When the name of a firm is repeated, the initials alone need be used. The out dot is replaced by the "a" stroke in about a; care must be taken that the two strokes are not of equal length, however, so that the outline cannot be mistaken for an equal-mark. The commercial abbreviation /. o. 6. is phrased. (156) The phrase are-not illustrates again how safe the phrases are, even though they may sometimes combine into an outline that has a meaning of its own. Are-not has the same outline as rat, which does not fit into the sense of the sentence. See how 100 cents is written. (157) In this connection avail can be nothing but available. Note the short outline for so-far-{as)-I-know. One I is omitted from that-you-ivill-lose. (158) Note the phrasing of all and together, resulting in altogether. See how clearly the is shown in ivith-the-good. Look at the phrase it-might-be-well, where w can hardly read anything but well. The initial contraction for date cannot be taken for day, as the latter would be written by the long ay stroke above the line. (159) Observe the phrases that-if-they-could-make and about to-do ; also the substitution of er for ur in turn. Writing Exercise on Logograms. Letter to a Young Man who has just Left College. My Dear Henry :— I understand that-you-are about to^ leave *school and to-enter-the field* of commercial activity. According to-what-I-heard,^ you-have *well fulfilled-your duties during-your stay at-the school, and have graduated with honors, upon which I sinc(erely) congratulate-you. Ou-my *last visit, I-*told-you that I-should probably not see you-again ^ for-sonie-time, and I therefore take*-this opportunity to write-you a-few fatherly* lines, and to-warn-you against-the dangers that-may beset-your *path. I-did^-so when your older brother started* on-his career, and he appreciated my words* so-much that-I-am inclined* to-do-the same in-your-case. In-order to-*achieve success in life, it-is-not necessary to be possess(ed) of extraordinary talents, or to be favor(ed) by a special stroke* (of) *good-luck. Never *couut on such *chances. Instead of waiting for success, *work for it from-the very start* ^. Just do your duty manfully and *conscientiously. I-could' mention many instances,^ where men with ordinary intellect, but with-an extra supply of persistency, rose in-the-world ; while-many a genius lias remained unknown, because he *relied too-much upon his ingenuity. If-the Lesson 17 . -^^^ ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ -^ /^_/^^'-^/. . /^^ Reference List of Logograms and Related Outlines. 2-9 i/ ia Ju J/ -^^ ^3 Jy ^i" J^Y ^^ ^^t^f '■'o ^/ ^-2 ^-^ ^-Z ^^ ^^ ^^7 ^<^ ...\ .._^.. ..^ ... X K. .r\^ /oy /Of /Of //o ///■ //X. / 7 / . . ..- _. _.. s ..1. s ; i / / ■6- ^ ^^- " /J5> /Vo /V/ 'V^ /yj /Vf^ 'VJ. /<ond ; and as the context here clearly implies the word loar corresi^ondent the ending ent may also be omitted, leaving ivar corresp. See how oo is substituted for u in the final contraction for endure. Observe the ending ps (for ships) in hardships, where har'd is contracted. See also how loounded is contracted initiallj\ (18) Observe s added to the contraction for deed. Note the frequent group i-eminds-me, actually written remi-me. Look also carefully at the group ivhieh-ivas-made-p>ossihle. See how quick and tvit are contracted finally ; and how liberal (libral) is written in full. (19) The short u in capitidated is replaced by e. To-ire-the news is unmistakably "to- wire-the-news.' ' (21) Determ. will be safe for determined, the more so as it is preceded by was. Note other, where low position is indicated by placing it under the ayiy stroke. (22) It is hardly necessary to add any other syllable to the outline conseq. Note the contraction get oid, where the oid dot stands under the g, which represents the word get in full with the exception of final t. See how conveniently ptr blended can be used ir chapters, where s is omitted. Lesson 19. TxS' ^^. p ? (C 9/ •^^ Z-/ Q^ / A^ ^ ^ ^'-/'-'^^'^^^^^ ^. (L ^^ —-.1^ ^ :>d^ -f^ ^/^ ^ ^'^i^ y ^ d' ^ ^9^y Pi- ^A .^^ /5 7 ^ -^ ^. '-^ - V C- v-^ r (:: / ^ "^-^ ^^^^ V*^-. ^^ ^- "^^ 7^ "^/// V ^ ^^^ = ^~-. -) rU ^1^ 'V^"^^,^^ ^ ^ >»^ '7 /3 ^^ ^^ — ^ ^-^ 9^ ^ ^^^ c^ a. I / ^^ ^^ ^-^ A^ y^- — o "Z"^ O. — - ^^ / -^ zf-" "^///-V^ 128 GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. Writing Exercises. Origin of-the United States Navy. (The figures are to be written with tlie aid of the shortening devices.) Among-some papers found* some-time-ago in-an old mansion in Delaware was a sheet* with-the following account : At a caucus in 1794, consist(ing) of Izard, Morris, and Ellsworth of-the Senate, Ames Sedgwick, Smith, Dayton, and others of-the Representatives, and of Secretaries Hamilton and Knox, to-*form a plan for-a national navy, Smith *began-the figuring as secretary of-the *meeting. Hamilton then took*-the pen, and instead (of) minuting the *proceedings, he amused-himself by-mak(ing) a variety of flourishes duriug-the discussion. In-consequence of-the plan adopt(ed) at this *meeting, a *bill was *reported for *build- ing six frigates, which ■formed the *foundation of-the American navy. The figuring! at-the *top* of-the page consists of five lines, and is as follows : First* cost* of a Frigate, 44 guns, of 1300 tuns and provision for 6 months $150,000 350 men 51,000 Provisions for 6 months 11,000 Total 212,000 Then follows an estimate of the annual cost of such a vessel. Contract. This Agreement*, made this twenty-fifth day* (of) January, 1899, by and between the John F. Collins Co., of Cliicago, 111., and F. D. Camp, of Philadelphia, Pa., witnesseth : I. Party of the first part^ agrees to-eraploy party of the second part* in-the capacity (of) *General-*Manager, for-the territorj^ *comprising Pennsylvania,* New York, New Jersey, Delaware, and-the District of Columbia. II. Party of the second part shall open an office in-the-city of Philadelphia, to be known as-the Eastern Office of the John F. Collins Co. III. The *expense of opening said office and of *conducting it shall-be-*borne by party of the first part. But it-is *expressly under(stood) that party of the second part shall-have- no power or authority to *contract debts or to-*make contracts *involving a *sum in excess of §50, without-having first* obtained the writ(ten) *consent (of the) party of the first i^art. IV. *Perfect and complete* records and books (of) account shall-be-*kept® at, and *concerning the business of the said Eastern Office ; which books and records shall at-all- times be-open' to-the *inspection (of the) party of the first part or its-duly^ *appointed and authorized *representative. It-is-also agreed that-a complete* *stateraent of tlie affairs of said office shall-be furnished once a *mouth to party of the first part ; and that-a *Cash *Statement shall be furnished not-*less-than once a week* to party of the first part. V. Party of the second part shall-have-the power* to-*engage salesmen and such other help as he-may *find necessary in-his judgment* to *conduct the business properly. VI. Party of the second part also agrees to-devote-his-entire-time and attention to- said business in-the inter(est) of party of the first part. VII. Party of the second part also agrees not to-engage in-the same-line (of) business in-the territory above mentioned within three years* after-the expiration^ of-this *contract. VIII. In consideration of-his serv(ices), party of the first part agrees to pay to party of the second part a salary of $3000 per year, payable in *monthly installments of $250. IX. If at the expiration (of the) first* year*, the business *conducted by-the party of the second part shall have proved* unprofitable, this *contract shall terminate. If-the business of the said Eastern Office shall-have proved profitable, this contract shall remain in *foree, unless dissolved by either party, notice to-that-*effect to be *given in writing thirty days prior to-the date (of) expiration. In witness whereof, i° we have hereunto" *set our hands and seals* the day* and year* first* above written.* Witness. (Seal) (Seal) GRAPHIC SHORTHAND. 129 Annotations.— 'i^;"£^? II 4, 2 11 7, " 161 Page 57 " 104 Pages 22, 27, 37, 45 Page 59 82 Lesson 7, word 166 Page 100 " 77 104 " 60 Lesson 7, word 120 " 2, " 31 " 7, " 129 " ", " 95 " 11, " 12 " 15, " 22 Page 90 Lesson 12, word 172 Page 5 Lesson 7, word 114 i stroke Lesson 1, word 6 i (AS in sick) " 2, " 29 i (INITIALLY) " 7, "121 i (FINALLY) " 7, "129 Initial Contraction . Page 82 Ing Endings ... Lesson 10, word 37 Logograms (Alphabet- ical List) Page 115 Long Words (How to Write them) "64 o Lesson 4, word 1 O (as IN to<— " A" SOUNDJ " 4, " 63 oi (AS IN boy) " 4, "97 Omissions Pages 59, 66, 75 Open Monosyllables . Page 114 Ordinal Numbers ... "69 ow (as in house) .... Lesson 2, word 95 OW (SIGN, initially) . . " 8, " 101 ow (SIGN, finally) ... " 8, " 95 Phrasing Pages 47, 60, 69, 75 Prefixes Page 57 Simple Words .... "82 Size of Letters (See General Rules) .... "5 Speed Practice .... "130 Substitution of Re- lated Sounds .... Lesson 11, word 50 Symbolical Vowel Representation . . . Page 11 Terminations "57 y stroke (final) .... Lesson 7, word 144 THE SHORTHAND PLATES have been so inserted as to cause the least inconvenience to the student. They will be found on the following pages : Lesson 1 . Page 6 2 . " 13 3 . " 19 4 . " 23 " 5 . " 26 Lesson 6 7 8 9 10 u (1 a? ■e32 u 41 (1 44 11 52 11 63 Lesson 11 12 13 14 15 Page 11 u 11 73 Lesson 16 . . Page 109 79 n 17. . " 117 87 II 18. . " 120 95 11 19. . " 127 101 REVIEW QUESTIONS will be found on the following pages: 20, 36, 56, 103, 119. notice.— When only the page is given, the heading will, in most cases, readily indicate the paragraph looked for. When the number of the lesson and the word is given, it refers to the first example of the rule in question. * In looking up the lesson, the student may be guided by the page number of the Shorthand Plate, as shown in the index. 133 GRAPHIC OF SHORTHAND ,„,^,^^^^„,, INSTITUTE... REFERENCE : C. R. LippMANN, Director J. B. Lippincott Company, Publishers Robert B. Erb, Secretary Philadelphia, Pa. INSTRUCTION IN GRAPHIC SHORTHAND GIVEN BY MAIL We also give Personal Instruction. Send for detailed announcement. UR standing offer of Free Courses of Instruction : — With a view to encouraging painstaking, conscientious study, we offer each month one free scholarship, to be awarded to the student who sends in the most correct exercise during the month ; if the tuition fee has already been paid, it will be refunded. For other Prize Offers, see Special Announcement. We furnish Dictionaries and other Reference Books, Fountain Pens, Note Books, Shorthand Pencils, and all supplies for Stenographers and ofiFice-workers ; also Graphic Exercise Paper, especially ruled for beginners in Graphic Shorthand. We recommend teachers to schools who wish to establish a course in Graphic Shorthand. P. O. Box 50 J, or Odd Fellows' Temple, Philadelphia, Pa. Any questions relating to Shorthand or kindred branches will be cheerfully answered. i For Rapid and especially for Stenographic Writing A* W* Faber's Reporting Pencils lAI A/w. FABER. REPORT/m P£A/C/L. s< A. W. Faber's" Shorthand" or ''Stenographic" Pencils They take fine, durable points, and write smoothly with clear, clean lines and agreeable color. Sold at moderate prices. A* W* Faber^s Siberian Leadpencils are drawing pencils of the highest order, cost double, but out- last two or three ordinary pencils. Their medium grades HB, F, or H, are eminently suitable for the most rapid stenographic work. There is nothing better. FOR SALE BY ALL STATIONERS ESTABLISHED 1 76 J A, W. FABER 78 Reade Street, New York Duplicate Shorthand Plates The study of the Shorthand Plates alone, ivithout the aid of the text, is of great assistance i?i the acquisition of the System. When the eye sees an outline, the mind instinctively recalls the rules according to which the outline was traced a?id the process by which they were logically evolved. We have therefore issued the Shorthand Plates alo7ie, 171 conve7iient forin for the pocket. Price, Postpaid, go Cents J. B. I^ippincott Company 11 Sample Book on application. Mention this publication. THE GRAPHIC SHORTHAND LIBRARY TO WRITE SHORTHAND is the easiest part of the stenographer's duties; the real test of his competency is his abilit>' to READ SHORTHAND,— to read his notes fluently. This can easily be done when they are written correctly. After the student has mastered the theor>' of the system, there is nothing that will so well supple- ment his practice and enable him to acquire a good style of writing, as reading Graphic Shorthand literature. In this manner his mind will unconsciously absorb the correct out- lines, and his eye will be trained in discriminating between good and bad stenographic forms. With this object in view, THE GRAPHIC SHORTHAND LIBRARY will be issued from time to time. It will contain interesting reading material written in Graphic Shorthand, and will be adapted to the needs of the beginner as well as to those of the advanced student. No. 1 will contain THE DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE and THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA PRICE - - - 13 CENTS ill 4 4 IIJ|I ff^\^r% ' ' Typewriter Ribbons and Carbon Papers (TRADE MARK) are always recognized as the oest "Qallinipper" Typewriter Carbon (TRADE MARK) Our New Invention ^X,':: MITTAG & VOLGER Largest Manufacturers Y'hSK RIDGE, N. J. of Typewnter Supplies The Reporting Styl f> * * of Graphic Shorthand Will pave the way for those who wish to qualify themselves for Court^ Convention^ and General Reporting "Graphic Shorthand — ■■• A 32-page Booklet in a Nutsheir' — Contains in concise form the fundamental principles of the Price, Postpaid. 6 Cents CorTespondcnce Style IV HARDT TL_Jf 5 n FAMOUS PENCILS # # "KOH-I-NOOR Pencils are the best made, and the name is a guarantee of quality." ^tmj....j.:im^.M^MM. m, "The best Fountain Pen is a KOH-I-NOOR Copying Ink Pencil." t COPYlNGINmNCe I -JCIL.1.4CHARDTMUTH VlfNHAjLi faL^-lVCHARDTMUTH VIENNA " «n.rE iSWoamWiWTOMK " For Uniformity, Reliability, Smooth and Easy Writing, it cannot be beaten." " Invaluable to Shorthand Writers." FOR SALE BY ALL STATIONERS L= k C. HARDTiHUTH LONDON NBW YORK VIKNNA THE REMINGTON-SHOLES CO. Manufacturers of A Machine of the TYPEWRITER Very riighest Cirade ^i^^f^ -^:-^:^.i.;#> r im. ^.**** - / ^ Especially desires Representatives among Schools and Teachers of Shorthand and Typewriting in the United States Communications addressed to FRANKLIN REMINGTON, General Manager J 27 Rees Street, Chicago will receive prompt attention VI EXTRACT FROM "SHORTHAND IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES," CIRCULAR OF INFORMATION ON SHORTHAND INSTRUCTION AND PRAC- TICE, BUREAU OF EDUCATION, WASHINGTON, D. C. Argentine Republic. — Gabelsberger system taught at Collegio Nuevo, Buenos Ayres. Austria. — The system of Gabelsberger is used almost exclusively; is taught in the public schools in the following languages: German, Italian, Czechish, Polish, Ruthenian, Slavonian, and Croatian, and is used exclusively in the legislative bodies, the Council of the Realm and the Delegations, and in the seventeen provincial Diets, for the official stenographic record. For instruction in schools, only the Gabelsberger system is permitted. Brazil. — An adaptation of the Gabelsberger system has been issued at Rio de Janeiro. Bulgaria. — Gabelsberger shorthand introduced and taught in schools by the government ; it is also used in the National Assembly. Denmark. — Gabelsberger shorthand used in Parliament. Instruction in the system given in the (Government) Training School for Parliamentary Reporters, also in the Naval Officers' School. Finland. — Gabelsberger system used in Parliament and in the High Schools. Germany. — Gabelsberger shorthand taught in High Schools, used in the Reichstag and in the National Assemblies of the Federal States (with one exception). Used in the courts and in the army. The Royal Stenographic Institute at Dresden is the only government Short- hand University (of academic rank) in the world, and has been established in the interest of Gabelsberger shorthand exclusively. Hungary. — Gabelsberger shorthand introduced in High Schools, and used in the Hun- garian Parliament. Greece. — Gabelsberger system used in the National Council at Athens. Italy. — Stenography is hardly used in this country ; but in a few Government Technical Schools, and by seventeen societies, the Gabelsberger system is taught. Norway. — Mr. Chappelen, Chief Parliamentary Shorthand Writer at Christiana, writes: "We use here the system of Gabelsberger exclusively." Russia. — At the " Government Competition" the prize was equally divided between the Gabelsberger system and the Stoize (which is based on the Gabelsberger) system. Servia. — Gabelsberger shorthand is used in the Senate. Spain. — Gabelsberger system is used to a limited extent. Sweden. — With three exceptions, all of the thirty-four parliamentary reporters use Gabels- berger shorthand. Switzerland. — From 1876 to 1S84, thirty-six larger or smaller works, by official commis- sion, were executed by Swiss stenographers of the Gabelsberger system. The above report was published in 1893, but the data were compiled in 1889—90. Since then, the system has spread considerably. According to the Dresden Year Book, — which fur- nishes official statistics, — Gabelsberger's system of shorthand is now used in the following languages: English, German, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Dutch, Bohemian, Polish. Hungarian, Croatian, Slovenian, Ruthenian, Servian, Bulgarian, and Greek. vii FROM PEOPLE WHO USE THE SYSTEM. C. R. LiPPMANN, Cj„ y. B. Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, Pa. Dear Sir: — "We take pleasure in stating to you herewith that all of the stenographers employed by us during the past twelve or fifteen years have used, and those employed by us at present are using, the Gabelsberger system of shorthand, to our entire satisfaction." — Steinway & Sons, A'ezu York City. " I take pleasure in informing you that Gabelsberger Shorthand has been used in the office of Messrs. Heidelbach, Ickelheimer & Co. for the last twelve years with satisfactory results. I trust that the text-book which you are publishing will gain many friends to that system in Philadelphia." — I. J. Adler, Stenographer, Heidelbach, Ickelheimer ^ Co., Bankers, Ne-M York City. " I take much pleasure in stating that I use the Gabelsberger Graphic Shorthand system to my own and to my employers' satisfaction. I consider the system the best of all existing ones." — Edward Bernard, -with Kessler <5r» Co., Bankers, ^4 Wall Street, N'eiu York City. " I would like advance papers on Stenography, as I have written Shorthand for many years, but think the Graphic system the best I have seen thus far." — Geo. H. Ervin, Troy Sheet Metal Co., Troy, N. Y. " I have been a student of Graham's, Osgoodby's, Munson's, Longley's, Burnz's, etc., and have the text-books of all of them, besides some other well known authors ; but, as a system, I prefer the Gabelsberger to any that I know of." — R. Barnard, OJice of M. P. Hayes, Sheriff and Tax Collector, Bridgeport, Mono County, Cal. " I have practiced Gabelsberger Shorthand for a number of years, and have been much impressed with its beaut}', legibility, and speed, and above all things, its educative force. There is no system, so far as I know, which appeals so much to the reasonijig poiver of the student as does the Gabelsberger system." — F. M. Wiemer, principal. First District School, Milwaukee, Wis. " I am an old Isaac Pitman Phonographer, but find the rising generation do not master it as well as they should, and if your system is as good as it seems to be from the sample you sent me, I think I can use it to advantage among students who are not willing to put in the necessarj' time on the Geometric systems." — E. Pring, M.D., San Francisco, Cal. "I have been getting into the system from the lessons you sent me . . . and so far am pleased with it. I must say here that I have practiced and taught the various Pitmanic styles for nearly fifteen years ; also learned and taught several systems radically different from the Pitmanic, which knowledge makes it easier to get into and form a practical idea in regard to what a system is worth, than otherwise. ... I would like verj' much to pursue the Graphic with your kind assistance." — W. H. Wagner, Teacher of Shorthand, High School, Los Angeles. " I began to study the Gabelsberger system a little over a year ago, and I can now report trials with much greater ease than I could after ten years' practice with the Pitman system. The Gabelsberger Shorthand is the system." — G. F. HOFF, Anthracite, Cal. (The word the was underlined by Mr. HofiF.) viii " I like the system very well so far as I have examined it, and I hope I shall be more satisfied with it as I advance. I have studied thoroughly several systems of shorthand, but I am dissatisfied with all the Geometric systems." — James F. Leddy, Whitestone, L. I. " I am sorry I am not yet able to write to you in shorthand, as I have somewhat neglected the study of this system, owing to the fact that I can write Pitman sufficiently well for my present needs. I am, however, so well impressed with the Gabelsberger system, that I shall keep at it, as I am convinced that it is more legil^le than the Pitman system, and I believe that I personally can trace the characters faster than the Geometric ones, that is, I shall be able to after a little practice, as I can write longhand very rapidly." — W. Loveday, Box 1326, Tacoma, Wash. " I am now studying the reporting style, and am even more pleased with it than with the corresponding style. I have had some e.xperience with the Pernin system with its uniform omissions of the final parts of the words, and must say that I consider the varied omissions of your system far superior. I also find Graphic Shorthand very much easier on my hand than the Geometric systems, where the outlines are always a stumbling block by reason of their awkwardness." — John C. Murdoch, Golden Valley,' CaL "Must say that I like the study very well, and I think that it has at least one great advantage over the old systems of shorthand, not having so many intricate characters to be committed and confuse the learner, which also renders it capable of being retained when not practically employed. " I think, too, by exercising the same continuance required in the study of the old systems, any one should become equally proficient in a shorter time than by the old methods. In short, I think this a plain, practicable system." — P, J. Flood, Agent, Adams Express Co., Nobles- town, Pa. " I have done all the problems and will send them to you in a few days after I do the lesson in Shorthand, which I think is better than the Pitman system, as I have tried it." — Wm. Ohm, S»iithsoniatt Institute, Washington, D. C. •' Thank you for your kind expression of opinion in regard to the legibility of my writing. It seems to me that the system ought to get the credit for this. I have found in my work that the legibility of the system is beyond praise." — J. Black, Denver, Col. " 1 use Grapnic snorthand now in place of my Geometric system, and I am sure it has many advantages over the latter. It is certainly more legible, and easier to write. I have always found the reading of my notes a matter of great annoyance ; but I never, as yet, had trouble in making out my Graphic notes." — Fred. S. Fleming, Fruit Vale, Cal. " Your Graphic course of stenography 1 consider fine, and shall study it with pleasure, and, I hope, with profit." — Kate Eagles, Teacher, Lancaster, Pa. "I like the system." — James D. Clifford, .A'i Y. " Your system of stenography I find very easy, and don't find any trouble in keeping the letters in mind.". — A. Poeh.mann, Syracuse, N. Y. " I have just started in on the stenography — I am delighted with it." — H. H. Day, Zan- singburg, JV. V. "Would that all shorthand writers knew its unequalled advantages." — Rev. P. Walter Stahley, Carrollto-wn, Pa. " I gave up practicing shorthand until a month ago, when I began to take it up again, and to my surprise found that I had practically lost nothing. I regard this as the highest recom- mendation of the system, for I had practiced it only four months last year, and had not touched it in ten months. I find it invaluable in taking notes while interviewing, and one night last week took a Column interview from dictation by the system." — Fred. D. Schrader, IVask- ingtoti Post, Washington, D. C. "The undersigned, having studied and taught the shorthand system invented by Gabels- berger for about thirty years, is exceedingly glad to learn that in its adaptation to the English language it is to be pushed in this country by the well known publishing house of J. B. LlP- PINCOTT Company, of Philadelphia. Success to the new undertaking !" — F. W. Stellhorn, President, Capital University, Cohanbus, Ohio. " Having studied some years ago the German system of Gabelsberger's Stenography, which I understand is about to be introduced in this country by the J. B. Lippincott Com- pany, of Philadelphia, I can heartily recommend the system, and hope that the above firm may be successful in introducing the same," — E. P. Mayser, Pastor, Zion's Lutheran Church, Lancaster, Pa. " My experience has been a very satisfactory one as regards the system in ques- tion. I came to this country in 1882. . . . While up to that time I had never dreamt of using the Gabelsberger system for any other language than German, force of necessity made me apply it to the English, and I succeeded beyond expectation. I have since occupied, at various times, positions as stenographer for German and English in the best mercantile houses, such as Messrs. Ladenburg, Thalman & Co., Wm. Steinway & Sons, and for the last eleven years I have been with the banking house of Messrs. August Belmont & Co I welcome most heartily such a work as you propose to publish, since it will no doubt tend to win many new friends in this country for our beautiful and well-tried system." — Adolph Frank, Head Stenographer, August Behnont ^f Co., New York City. " I know the Gabelsberger-Richter shorthand, and believe it has a fine future before it. The world's universal shorthand will be a script system with joined vowels; there is no doubt about that. It admits of abbreviation not possible with Geometric systems ; and the latter, as the weaker, will evidently drop out. Of course this is dreadful heresy, but I was never one of those prejudiced people who think that wisdom will die with (Pitmanic) phonography. I think the Germans have laid hold of the best end of the stick, and that the universal shorthand will come from Germany, or be based upon a German system." — y. L. Cobbin. Court Reporter, South Africa. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY Los Angeles This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. FormL9-10m-3,'48(A7920)444 UNIVERSITY ot CALIFOKWIa AT LOS ANGELES UBRARY ^po ijippincinn— L66 1 Lessons in gra phi c shorthand. JAN 1 1 ic1ri OVERDuI Z56 L66 1 £^ ,«5 *j. tf«.^«.-i- 1«, »/" _^ try >*• •t>»v>t>M>-^t'>M >StW^